Skip to main content

Full text of "Whales, &c"

See other formats













Library 
of the 

University of Toronto 






Qt: C 

l 








<r 


H 






















Fnaraved fir th&JVaturalist's library. 














Til 





\r®Hdo^/Ho 



Narwhal. 


EDINB URGTI 

Wll.lAZARS . 

LONDON, SAMUEL HIGHLEX .V2ELEET STREET. 
DUBLIN.W.CURKXJUN? 8.-C? 

















THE 


NATURALIST’S LIBRARY. 


EDITED BY 

SIR WILLIAM JARDINE, BART., 

F.R.S.E., F L.S., ETC., ETC. 


YOL. VII. 


MAMMALIA. 

WHALES, &c. 

BY ROBERT HAMILTON, ESQ., M.D., 

F.R.S.E., M.W.S., ETC. 


EDINBURGH: 

W. H. LTZARS, 3, ST. JAMES’ SQUARE; 

S. HIGHLEY, 32, FLEET STREET, LONDON; AND 
W. CURRY, JUN. AND CO., DUBLIN. 

1843. 





































































V ; 

















' 
















' 

- 

- 





. 






















ADVERTISEMENT. 


It will occur to many of our Readers that the order 
of Mammalia, to which the present Volume of the 
Naturalist’s Library is devoted, viz. the Cetacea or 
the ordinary or fish-like Whales, have some claims 
to a place in our series. It is true that these tribes 
have none of those rural charms which are con¬ 
nected with our flocks and herds : and still less can 
they attract the eye, as do the rich and golden hues ' 
. which adorn the humming-bird and paint the wings 
of the butterfly; though it will be found that, even 
in this respect, they possess a richness and variety 
not generally supposed. But leaving this; when 
•we consider the singular peculiarities in the consti¬ 
tution of Whales,—that they are warm-blooded 
mammalia, that is to say, that they breathe as the 
terrestrial mammalia, and suckle their young, and 
yet are as completely aquatic as true fish; and 
when, moreover, we reflect that they vary in size 
from the dimensions of a salmon to a length of 

a 



X 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


upwards of a hundred feet, and a weight of nearly 
as many tons;—that some of the genera swarm 
beneath the perennial ice of either pole, whilst 
others display their glowing hues within the tropics; 
and when to this we add, that in the pursuit of 
some of them, large navies are annually equipped 
by the most enterprising nations, and many a bold 
and adventurous seaman perils his life in the arctic 
seas, or nearly circumnavigates the globe,—no one 
we apprehend can doubt that the present subject is 
invested with the highest possible interest. 

We have devoted a chapter of this Volume to 
the singular structure and economy of the tribe: 
and we have then dwelt more particularly upon the 
Greenland Whale, upon the adventures and dangers 
attendant upon its capture, and on the products 
and history of the Northern Whale Fishery. We 
have done the same in relation to the Spermaceti 
Whale, and concerning the products and peculiari¬ 
ties of the South Sea Fishery. Nor have we for¬ 
gotten a larger Whale than either, the Rorqual, in 
viewing which we contemplate by far the greatest 
giant of all presently-existing creatures. From 
these mighty monsters w r e descend to the smaller 
kinds, some of which are found in every sea, in¬ 
cluding the Sea-unicorn and the Grampus, the 
Dolphins and Porpoises. These altogether extend 
to nearly twenty distinct genera, which have in all 
ages peculiarly provoked the curiosity of mankind, 
as they continue to do without abatement to the 
present day. We have endeavoured, to the full 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


XI 


extent of our limits, to address, both to the eye and 
to the mind, all that is reallv known of these crea- 
tures, rejecting whatever is erroneous and doubtful, 
insisting only on the sober, though not less wonder¬ 
ful realities of truth, and stimulating and directing 
all who may have opportunities to renewed investi¬ 
gations. 

Such are the chief objects of the present Volume; 
but it is proper to remind our subscribers that a 
portion of the great order Whales still remains un¬ 
described, and which we found could not have been 
at present introduced without doing injustice to their 
history. It is therefore proposed ere long to devote 
to this other part a second volume, which will com¬ 
mence with the Herbivorous Cetacea , and in which 
we shall also endeavour to trace the reality and 
history of a race of huge animals, known under the 
popular titles of Mermaids , Sea Serpents , Krakens , 
&c.; and which, while we cannot doubt their exist¬ 
ence as singular creatures of some kind, we are 
totally at a loss what form or nature to attribute to 
them; in conclusion, we shall add the history of 
the marine carnivora , or the Walrous , Seals , Otories , 
&c.; animals both singular, instructive, and im¬ 
portant in the commerce of nations. 

Our next publication Mali be Vol. I. of the 
“ Birds of Western Africa ” by William Swainson, 
Esq. This subject will be completed in two vo¬ 
lumes : the First, devoted to the Birds of Prep and 
a portion of the Perching Birds ; the Second, con¬ 
cluding the Perching Birds , and containing the 


Xll ADVERTISEMENT. 

Gallinaceous Birds , the Waders , and the Swimmers . 
The whole of the Illustrations are taken from 
Mr. Swainson’s characteristic drawings, and we 
trust it will he perceived that no expense is or will 
he spared, to render “ The Library,” in every 
department, useful and attractive. 


CONTENTS 


OF 

VOLUME SIXTH, 


Memoir of Lacepede .... 

• • 

PAGE 

17 

Introduction. 

• • 

33 

Comparative Anatomy of the Cetacea. Plate I. 

43 

First Genus.— Bal^na .... 
The Greenland Whale. 

• 

76 

Balcena Mysticeius. Plate II. . 

• • 

76 

Food of the Whale. Plate III. 

• • 

87 

Northern Whale Fishery . . . 

• • 

93 

Whale breaching, or leaping out of the water. 

Plate IV. 

113 

Whale upsetting a boat. Plate IV *. 

Whale of the Southern Seas. 

• • 

115 

Balcena Australis . . . 

• • 

122 

Second Genus.— Rorqualus . 

Great Northern Rorqual. 

• 

125 

Rorqualus Borealis . Plate V. 

• 

125 

Skeleton of the Great Northern Rorqual. 
The Lesser Rorqual. 

Plate VI. 

139 

Rorqualus Rostratus Plate VII. 

Rorqual of the Southern Seas. 

• 

142 

Rorqualus Australis 

• • 

146 

Fossile Rorquals, &c. 

• • 

150 

Third Genus.— Cachalot 

• • 

154 

The Spermaceti Whale from Frith of Forth. 

PI. VIII. 

154 

The Spermaceti Whale of Southern Ocean. 

Plate IX. 

158 

The South Sea Fishery 

• 

169 

Dying Struggles of the Spermaceti Whale. 

Plate X. 

171 


The Heterodons (with few and heterogeneous teeth) 181 




XIV 


CONTENTS 


Fourth Genus.—N arwhalus 

The Narwhal, or Sea Unicom. Plate XI. . 

Fifth Genus.—D iodons, or Two-teethed Whales 
Two-teethed Whale of Desmarest. 

Diodon Desmaresti ..... 
Two-teethed Whale of Sowerby. 

Diodon Sowerbi. Plate XII. 

Sixth Genus_ Hyperoodontes 

Buttle-nosed Whale of Hunter. 

Hyperoodon Ilonjloriensis. Plate XIII. 

Seventh Genus.—A odons. Toothless Whales 
Toothless Whale of Havre. 

A. Dalei. Plate XIV. 

Eighth Genus_ Ziphius (Fossile) 

Zipldus Planirostris ..... 

The Delphinle (with teeth in both jaws) . 

Ninth Genus_ Beluga .... 

White Whale. 

Beluga. Plate XY. .... 

Tenth Genus_ Delphinapterus (Dolphin without 

dorsal fin) ...... 

Delphinapterus Peronii. Plate XYI. 

Eleventh Genus_ Globicephalus 

The Deductor, or Ca’ing Whale. 

Globicephalus Deductor or Melas. Plate XVII. 
The Globiceps of Risso. 

Globicephalus Rissii. Plate XVIII. . 

Fossile Globiceps ..... 

Twelfth Genus.—P hoc/ENA .... 

The Common Porpoise. 

Phocasna Communis. Plate XIX. Fig. 1. . 

The Porpoise of the Cape of Good Hope. 

Phoccena Capensis. Plate XIX. Fig. 2. 

The Grampus. 

Phoccena Grampus. Plate XX. 


PAGE 

182 

182 

191 

191 

192 
194 

194 

198 

198 

201 

201 

202 

204 


204 


210 

210 

212 

oio 

219 

220 

222 


222 


227 


228 



CONTENTS. XT 

PAGE 

The Grey Porpoise. 

P. Griseus. Plate XXI. .... 233 

The Striped Porpoise. 

Phoccena Bivittatus Plate XXII. Fig. 1. . 234 

Thirteenth Genus.— Delphinus .... 236 

The Common Dolphin. 

Delphinus Communis, Plate XXIII. . . 238 

Pemetty’s Dolphin. 

D. Pemetti. Plate XXIY. .... 244 

The Lead-coloured Dolphin. 

D. Plumbeus, Plate XXY. Fig. 1. . . . 246 

The Bridled Dolphin. 

D. Fraenatus. Plate XXY. Fig. 2. . . . 24Z 

Dolphin with white mark over the Eye. 

Delphinus Superciliosus. Plate XXVI. . . 248 

The Funenas of the Chilians. 

D. Lunatics. Plate XXII. Fig. 2. . 250 

Delphinus Youngii (Fossile) . . . . 251 

Fourteenth Genus.— Delphinorhyncus . . 252 

Delphinorhyncus of Breda. 

D. Brcdanensis. Plate XXVII. . . . 252 

Fifteenth Genus.—Soosoo .... * 254 

Soosoo of the Ganges. ' 

S. Gangeticus Plate XXVIII. . . . 254 

The Soosoo of M. De Borda (Fossile). 

S. Bordaii ....... 257 

Sixteenth Genus.— Inia ..... 259 

1. of Bolivia. 

I. Boliviensis. Plate XXIX. .... 259 

Seventeenth Genus.— Oxypterus .... 262 

Rhinoceros Whale. 

Oxypterus Rhinoceros . . . . . 262 

Portrait of M. Le Comte de Lacepede ... 2 

Vignette, Title Page. $ 

In all, Thirty-Two Plates in this Volume. 










MEMOIR 


OF 

M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 


As Le Comte de Lacepede was the author of that 
elegant and classical work on the Cetacea, which 
for so many years has been the most popular treatise 
on the subject, we have thought that we could not 
submit to the attention of our readers a more ap¬ 
propriate biographical memoir than a brief sketch 
of this very illustrious and most amiable man. 

Bernard-Germain-Etienne de La Yille was 
born at Agen on December 26, 1756. He was 
descended from a long line of honourable ancestors ; 
and his father, Jean Joseph de La Ville, was lieu¬ 
tenant-general of Senechausee. Lacepede, however, 
did not value himself on his extraction, but entered 
life with the determination of exhibiting his birth 
only by the urbanity of his manners and the upright¬ 
ness of liis conduct. This resolution he maintained 

S 

with the most scrupulous uniformity throughout his 
chequered history; his politeness was proverbial, 

VOL. VI. B 



18 


MEMOIR OP 


whilst it was universally acknowledged that he was 
as obliging as he w r as polished, and that he did not 
more indulge in compliment than in rendering 
important services, and in bestowing substantial 
favours. His father superintended his education 
with great care, and received valuable assistance 
from M. de Cliabannes, the Bishop of Agen; and 
it was remarked that during his younger years the 
idea of a bad author or of a wicked man scarcely 
presented itself to his mind. When twelve years of 
age, as he himself stated, he imagined that all poets 
resembled Corneille and Racine, that all historians 
were like Bossuet, and all moralists like Fenelon. 
He had thus from Iris earliest year's a great leaning 
to optimism, and would scarcely believe that any one 
was actuated by bad feelings or intentions, or that 
any one wished to deceive; and this prepossession 
had great influence over his conduct and writings, 
as w'-ell as on his social liabits. 

Buffon’s Natural History was one of those books 
which was early put into his hands, and it instantly 
became a favourite; it was the companion of Iris 
w r alks, and that in one of the finest countries of the 
world. It was on the beautiful banks of the lovely 
valley of the Garonne, in the neighbourhood of those 
smiling hills which are so majestically terminated by 
the peaks of the Pyrenees that he studied the elo¬ 
quent pictures of this great writer: his passion for 
the beauties of Nature thus originated at the same 
time with his admiration for that great painter who 
( printed them out to his contemplation, and these 


M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 


19 


two sentiments always remained united in liis mind. 
He took Buffon for his master and liis model, and 
read him till he a lm ost knew him by heart. 

About this time the love and cultivation of music 
not less strongly took possession of liis mind. His 
father and many of his near* relatives were musi¬ 
cians, and he often joined their concerts. This 
art afforded him inexpressible delight, and became 
to him a second language, which he could write 
and speak with equal facility. Both the airs which 
he composed, and the mode of his execution gene¬ 
rally, were greatly admired. He was often requested 
to compose, and ere long he engaged in the labo¬ 
rious task of an opera; this introduced him to the 
acquaintance of the celebrated Gluck, who greatly 
admired and cherished his genius. 

Natural philosophy also, at this time, formed an 
object of his pursuit. At the age of thirteen he 
formed, with some of his school-fellows, a juvenile 
society, several members of which subsequently 
became members of the Institute. Their investiga¬ 
tions became more important as their years ad¬ 
vanced; and electricity and magnetism, among other 
subjects, engaged their attention. Lacepede having 
made some experiments, and deduced conclusions, 
which appeared new to him, he transmitted them 
to Buffon, who noticed them in the supplements of 
his w r ork. 

At the age of twenty-one, Lacepede resorted to 
Paris, where, on his arrival, he made the formal 
acquaintance of his correspondents, Gluck and Buf- 



20 


MEMOIR OP 


fon, by both of whom he .was received in the most 
flattering maimer. He closed the day, as he began 
it, in a kind of enchantment; he spent the evening 
with his relative, the Archbishop of Lyons, where 
he met with the elite of the academicians, and from 
that time he determined to devote himself to science 
and to music. This resolution was scarcely approved 
by his family, whose interest might have advanced 
him in the army, in the diplomatic line, or at the 
bar. In these circumstances, a German prince, 
whose acquaintance he made in Paris, offered to 
procure him the brevet rank of colonel in one of 
the smaller states. This appointment led him to 
pay two short visits about this time to Germany, 
where he acquired his nominal rank, with his uni¬ 
form and epaulettes; and his friends being thus 
satisfied, he was allowed henceforward to follow the 
bent of his inclination. 

Lacepede now devoted some years very assidu¬ 
ously to music. He composed an opera, which, 
after being on the eve of performance, was from 
some trifling occurrence suppressed. In 1785 he 
published a work, in two octavo volumes, La 
Poetique de la Musique , which procured him many 
admirers, • among whom the great king of Prussia, 
Frederick II. was one, and Sacchini another. 

Shortly afterwards, Lacepede published two works 
on physics; one on Electricity, and the other en¬ 
titled Physique Gencrale et Particuliere. Neither of 
them, though both written with eloquence, procured 
the commendation of competent judges; and, after 



M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 


21 


the lapse of a few years, he was so convinced of 
their imperfection, that he used his best exertions 
to suppress them. 

At this time, Buffon very opportunely opened up 
a way by which the Count might usefully exercise his 
talents. He proposed that he should continue that 
part of his work on Natural History which treated 
of animals ; and that he might do so with the 
greater advantage, he offered him the situation of 
under-demonstrator of the Cabinet du Roi , which 
had been just vacated by the younger Dauben- 
ton. Lacepede gladly accepted these proposals, 
and though some of the attendant duties were 
somewhat menial, he discharged them with the 
greatest assiduity. He attended in the museum on 
public days, and with his accustomed politeness 
answered the inquiries of the curious, whether 
poor or rich. To many this task might have been 
disagreeable, but he did it to please a beloved mas¬ 
ter, and to fit himself for being his successor, and 
these ideas ennobled every thing. 

In 1788, some months before the death of Buffon, 
Lacepede published the first volume of his History 
of Reptiles, which comprehended the oviparous qua¬ 
drupeds ; and the following year, the second, which 
treated of Serpents. These quartos, by the elegance 
of their style, and the interest of the numerous facts 
they embodied, were judged worthy of the great 
work of which they formed the continuation. He 
established classes, orders, and genera, and accu¬ 
rately characterized these divisions; he enumerated 


oo 

J*J±J 


MEMOIR OF 


and named the species with care, and as metho¬ 
dically, though not so philosophically, as Linnaeus 
himself. He also described a great number of new 
species, raising the number to tw r o hundred and 
eighty-eight. 

But at this epoch, a great change took place in 
the prospects of the young Naturalist, by the oc¬ 
currence of those great events, wdiich overturned 
every thing in France at the Revolution. Power 
then became the daily product of popular favour, 
and every month saw some great reputation fall, 
and some unknown and worthless person start from 
obscurity. Many of the celebrated men in France 
w r ere at that time invited and drawn in to take a 
part in those agitating transactions, and Lacepede, 
from his great popularity, had peculiar difficulty in 
avoiding them. He was successively chosen presi¬ 
dent of his section, commander of the national 
guard, extraordinary deputy of Agen to the As - 
semblee Constituante , member of the general council 
of the department of Paris, president of the electors, 
deputy of the first legislature, and president of that 
assembly. In all these situations he attempted to 
act with his habitual kindness; hut that was a sen¬ 
timent with which, ere long, there was no general 
sympathy. One morning, Lacepede saw his name 
at the head of an article in the newspaper entitled, 
“ list of the Scelerats who vote against the people/’ 
He had been, and still was slow in thinking that 
matters would come to extremities, or that there w r as 
any general risk of personal safety; and the good 


M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 


23 


opinion he entertaine-d of mankind was too deeply 
rooted to allow him to suspect that truth and jus¬ 
tice would not immediately resume the ascendancy. 
But, in waiting their return, his friends saw he was 
exposing himself to imminent danger; and, almost 
by main force, they removed him from the capital. 
He had not been long in the country till he longed 
to return, and he imagined that nothing would 
be more simple than to demand permission from 
Robespierre. Happily the monster had that day a 
spark of humanity about him, “ He’s in the country? 
—he demanded: Tell him to stay there.” It is 
certain, an hour’s residence in the metropolis would 
have been fatal to him; his retreat was searched 
for; and he could not venture to return to Paris 
till after the 9th of Thermidor. 

He returned with a singular title for a man of 
forty, who was already known by so many eminent 
w'orks ; it was that of a scholar of the Normal 
school. The convention, at last giving up its 
cruelties, imagined it might create as speedily as it 
had destroyed ; and that, for the re-establishment of 
general education, it might in a few weeks educate 
masters with the help of a few celebrated men, who 
would only require to point out to them the best 
methods of proceeding. Fifteen hundred indivi¬ 
duals were sent, 'with this object in view, from the 
departments. M. Lacepede found himself on the 
same bench with the celebrated Bougainville, a sep- 
tuaginarian, and a general officer, equally famous as a 
writer and a mathematician; with the grammarian, 


24 


MEMOIR OF 


Wailly, who had been esteemed as a classical 
author for forty years, and with Fourrier. La Place 
himself, and this is saying much, appeared in this 
strange scene as a scholar; and it was by the side 
of such men as these, that there were seated pea¬ 
sants who could scarcely read. The influence of 
these great men was soon felt in society, and was 
highly useful in the metropolis. 

Lacepede, after his retirement, was not legally a 
member of the establishment of the Jardin des 
Plants , but scarcely was his name allowed to be 
pronounced in Paris, when those who had been 
appointed in his absence, urgently invited him to 
associate himself with them. For this purpose a 
new chair was appointed for him, connected with 
the history of Reptiles and Fishes. His lectures 
were most successful. A crowd of young men 
flocked round him, who, for three or four years, had 
been deprived of all instruction, and who were thus 
as it were famished. The politeness of the pro¬ 
fessor, the elegance of his language, the variety of 
the ideas and knowledge which he displayed, after 
so long an interval of barbarism, introduced as it 
were another and a better age. Then it was espe¬ 
cially that Lacepede assumed, in the public esti¬ 
mation, the rank of the successor of Buffon; as 
in him, in truth, were found many of his distin¬ 
guishing characteristics : he possessed the same art 
of giving interest to the driest details; and when 
Baubenton was approaching the termination of his 
career, the new professor remained the only re- 


M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 


25 


preservative of that great association which had 
laboured so successfully in the popular field of Na¬ 
tural History. It was on these accounts he was 
called upon to form a part of the nucleus of the 
Institute , and was thus one of those who were 
charged with the restoration of the Academie des 
Sciences. He was also one of its first secretaries, 
and his beautiful eloge on Dolomier makes it a 
matter of regret that he was raised to higher posts, 
from a situation which he would have filled better 
than any one else. This statement comes at least 
with as much grace as truth from the lips of Cuvier; 
who, in the discharge of the duties of the same 
office, pronounced the eloge of his predecessor. 

Of all the occupations in which M. de Lacepede 
had been induced to engage, the sciences alone, 
as is usual, remained faithful to him in the time 
of misfortune, and it was with them he consoled 
himself in his retreat. Resuming the habits of his 
youth, passing the day in the midst of the woods 
or on the banks of the rivers, he traced his plan 
of his Natural History of Fishes, the most im¬ 
portant of his works. Immediately after his return, 
he commenced its composition; and at the end of 
two years, in 1798, he found himself in a condition 
to publish the first volume. Five volumes appeared 
in succession, the last in 1803. All that he could 
collect regarding the organization of these animals, 
their habits, the wars which the human species 
wage against them, and the benefit derived from 
them, he has given in a pure and elegant style; he 


26 


MEMOIR OP 


has even diffused a charm over his descriptions, 
whenever the beauties, which have been imparted 
to them in so high a degree, permitted their being 
presented to the admiration of naturalists. “ And 
in fact,” says Cuvier, “ what can afford a greater 
subject of admiration, than those brilliant colours— 
that glare of gold, steel, ruby, and emerald, profusely 
poured upon beings which man scarcely ever na¬ 
turally meets with, and which are almost never 
seen in the obscure paths they frequent. Even 
at the present day (in 1826), there is no work on 
the history of fishes superior to Lacepede’s, and he 
is always quoted on the subject: when the immense 
materials collected in these latter days shall have been 
put together in another work, the brilliant pieces of 
colouring, full of sensibilty and deep philosophy, 
Math which he has enriched his Work, will not be 
forgotten. Science, from its nature, is every hour 
advancing; but the great writers will not remain 
the less immortal.” 

The Natural History of Fishes was followed, in 
1804, by that of the Cetacea, which terminates the 
great system of vertebrate animals. M. de Lace- 
pede considered it as the most perfect of Ills Works ; 
and in fact, he treated the historical and descriptive 
part, that referring to the organization and metho¬ 
dical characters, better than any one had done before 
him. His style also rises in some manner in propor¬ 
tion to the grandeur of his subject. He augments, 
by about a third, the number of the species. “ This 
author,” says Mr. Scorseby, “ has published the most 


M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 27 

voluminous and pleasing account of cetaceous animals 
that has ever appeared from the press.” He adds, 
“ the style is animated and poetical, and his history 
is a most interesting work; hut the interest, in 
many cases, is augmented at the expense of truth ; 
it is by no means accurate.” (Artie, reg. i. 447—9.) 
Perfectly agreeing in this criticism, and ascribing the 
many inaccuracies to the imperfect state of this very 
difficult branch of science at the time of the publi¬ 
cation, we deem these few words sufficient to put 
our readers on their guard, in their perusal of this 
interesting production. 

After this time M. Lacepede undertook a work 
somewhat different in its character; more philoso¬ 
phical, and less liable to become antiquated by the 
rapid progress of science. He designated it a 
History of the Ages of Nature , in which he com¬ 
prehended that of man,—considered in his indivi¬ 
dual developement, and in that of the race. The 
article Homme , in the Diet, cles Sciences Nat ur dies, 
is a sort of programme of what he contemplated on 
the physical history of our race. The romances 
which he wrote,— Ellival and Caroline , and Charles 
d’Ellival etAlphonsine de Florentine, —and published 
about this time, were considered by him as studies 
upon mans moral history. But it was soon ap¬ 
parent that in the midst of these meditations the 
gradual developement of social life had the most 
especial charms for him, and the naturalist gradu¬ 
ally merged into the historian; he dwelt chiefly 
upon the political and religious establishments 


28 


MEMOIR OF 


which hare appeared since the fall of the Western 
Empire. He left a history of them completed, 
and several volumes of this work have now been 
published. 

Besides these greater works, we find that M. 
Lacepede transmitted no fewer than twenty-three 
memoirs to the several societies of which he was a 
member, and to the respectable periodicals of the 
day, principally between the years 1796 and 1808; 
the last, On the Cetacea of the Japanese Seas , was in 
the year 1818. He also published in 1799 a new 
edition of Buffon in fifty-two volumes duodecimo, 
and wrote the preface to the Menagerie, in folio, in 
1801. 

We must now add, that about this period he made 
another change from these active literary pursuits to 
equally active political engagements. Very soon 
after the new government was established, he was 
gradually replaced in all the high offices he had pre¬ 
viously held. He was appointed senator in 1799, 
president of the senate in 1801, chancellor of the 
legion of honour in 1803, and minister of state in 
1804. 

In the general administration of the legion of 
honour, M. Lacepede conducted himself with the 
greatest talent and address, and to the satisfaction 
of every one. He likewise exerted himself in esta¬ 
blishing schools for the education of the orphans of 
those who had belonged to the legion, and procured 
comfortable accommodation for as many as nearly 
fourteen hundred of them. 


M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 


29 


Lacepede conducted the multifarious affairs in 
which he was engaged with a facility and rapidity 
which astonished all who were cognizant of it. For 
him one or two hours were sufficient to determine 
every thing, and with a most intimate knowledge 
of all the circumstances. This amazing rapidity 
surprised even Napoleon, who himself was much 
celebrated for despatch of business. One day this 
great man asked him, by what secret he did so 
much? to which the other replied,—“ I use the 
method employed by naturalistsan answer, which 
under the appearance of pleasantry contains much 
truth. 

Another circumstance which much struck his im¬ 
perial master, and which he hut rarely witnessed, was 
the extreme disinterestedness of Lacepede. This 
servant of the public would at first receive no salary; 
but, as his benevolence kept pace with his disin¬ 
terestedness, his patrimony was soon exhausted, and 
much debt was contracted, which there was no pros¬ 
pect of his being able to pay. Under these circum¬ 
stances, the head of the government insisted upon 
his talcing a regular salary, and ordered that all his 
arrears should also be paid up. The sole advantage 
which he derived from this act of kindness and 
justice, was, that it enabled him to increase his 
donations, tie considered himself accountable to 
the public for all* that he received; and, as he 
every day had occasion to see poor legionaries, and 
many of their widows, without any means of sub¬ 
sistence, he had ever before him those who were 


30 


MEMOIR OF 


objects of liis bounty. His liberality usually antici¬ 
pated their requests, and he often allowed them to 
suppose that his private charities flowed from the 
public funds. Much he bestowed without the re¬ 
cipients knowing whence it came. A gentleman 
who held a high offlce, having ruined himself by 
• speculation, abandoned his family, and Lacepede 
caused 500 francs per month to be regularly trans¬ 
mitted to his wife, till her son was old enough to 
support her; and this lady always imagined she 
received her income from her husband. 

A young man who was employed in one of the 
offices under his controul, appeared depressed and 
ill. The Count supposed there was some latent 
cause of anxiety, and employed his physician to dis¬ 
cover what it was. Having learned that the young 
man’s circumstances were hopelessly embarrassed, 
he immediately sent him 10,000 francs : the gentle¬ 
man hastened to him with tears in his eyes, in- 
treating him to fix the terms of reimbursement;— 
“ My friend,” he replied, “ I never receive any 
tiring of that sort.” 

What rendered Iris disinterestedness in every 
degree conformable with his munificence, was the 
fact, that he had very few personal wants. He had 
no expenses but what were required by the situa- 
ations which he held. He never possessed more 
than one suit at a time. After dressing in the 
morning he never changed throughout the day. Ilis 
diet was as simple as his clothing. From the age 
of seventeen he never drank wine, and a single and 


M. LE COMTE DE LACEPEDE. 31 

very slight repast was all he required. But what 
was most surprising, w r as the small quantity of sleep 
he took ; he usually slept two or three hours, and 
the rest of the night was employed in composi¬ 
tion, his memory retaining all the phrases and the 
very words; they were as if written in his brain, 
and early in the morning he dictated them to his 
secretary. He has stated, that in this way he 
could retain whole volumes ; could change them as 
he saw fit in his mind, and remember what he had 
thus corrected, as accurately as the original text. 
It was thus that nearly the whole day was free for 
business, for his public duties, and especially for the 
sweets of the family circle : for his external life, so to 
speak, however brilliant, was to him nothing in com¬ 
parison with his domestic enjoyments, in which he 
ever found a delightful solace for all his fatigues and 
trials. His attachment to his wife, Anne Caroline 
Juba, was beyond all praise; of which a satisfactory 
proof may be found in the impassioned language of 
the introduction to the Cetacea: “ After I had 
commenced this work, misfortune felled me to the 
ground, and lacerated my heart; I lost my beloved 
companion. Grief without hope,—gratitude,—vene¬ 
ration,—have inscribed the name of my Caroline on 
the dedication of my work on fishes ; and again in 
this work ; and they will consecrate all those I may 
undertake, till the end of my fearful banishment! 
Her name, which is dear to every virtuous and ten¬ 
der heart, will recommend my feeble efforts to the 
lovers of nature.” (Le 24 Nivose, An. 12—1804.J 


32 


MEMOIR OF, ETC. 

Many years afterwards he lost his only daughter, 
the wife of his adopted son; and immediately after 
this shock, he was hinself seized with the small¬ 
pox. In this last illness, almost the only one he 
had experienced during a life of seventy years, he 
continued remarkably to exhibit how much amia¬ 
bility and unalterable politeness were inherent in 
his nature. Not a word escaped him to show his 
sense of danger, though he apprehended death from 
the first moment of his seizure. He died on the 
6th of October, 1825. 

On the day of his funeral, the crowd, many 
of them unfortunate and miserable, who came to 
weep over his tomb, was the best proof of his 
liberality and benevolence: and these virtues are 
not less distinctly proclaimed by the fact, that, after 
having long filled the most eminent situations, and 
having enjoyed, for ten years, the especial favour of 
the great Arbiter of Europe, the fortune w r hich he 
left was much less than that which he had inherited 
from his father. 


CETACEA. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The present Volume of the Naturalist’s Library 
is dedicated to an order of animals, which in point 
of interest yields to none presented to our contem¬ 
plation in the whole range of animated nature. 

The monarch of the deep is, in regard of dimen¬ 
sions at least, the monarch also of creation ; the 
largest and most formidable of land animals shrink¬ 
ing into utter insignificance when brought into com¬ 
parison with his prodigious hulk. The vast and 
expensive preparations which are made for the cap¬ 
ture of the whale, and the excitement and perils 
attendant upon the adventure, not only render it an 
object of great commercial importance, hut throw 
around it an air of something like chivalrous in¬ 
terest, in which every one must instinctively par¬ 
ticipate. But the main interest of our subject is to 
be found in its scientific investigation. If we pass 
from mere ignorant wonder to comprehensive and 
accurate observation, we shall find in this order of 
animals ample materials for exciting and gratifying 
yol. vi. c 



34 INTRODUCTION. 

/ 

the most enlightened curiosity, for expanding in no 
common degree, our conceptions of the harmony 
and beauty of the works of nature, and for raising 
to the highest pitch our admiration of the inex¬ 
haustible wisdom of the great Creator. 

The very position which the Cetacea occupy in 
the animal kingdom, forms in itself a subject of the 
deepest wonder and astonishment. 

Our readers are probably aware that of the four 
divisions into which Cuvier, the great master of 
natural science, has divided the animal kingdom, 
the first consists of the vertebrate. The verte¬ 
brate, which include the animals of the most perfect 
structure, are again subdivided into four great 
classes, forming a natural descending series beauti¬ 
fully simple and complete ; being 1st, Mammalia or 
Quadrupeds,—2dly, Birds,—3dly, Reptiles,—and 
4thly, Fishes. Each of these classes is characterized 
by a diversity of locomotive powers, which depends 
on the quantity of inspiration, inasmuch as this is 
the grand source whence the muscular system de¬ 
rives its irritability and strength. The efficiency of 
respiration again, depends upon the relative amount 
of blood which is forced into the respiratory organs 
in a given space of time, and the relative amount of 
oxygen which operates upon the circulating fluid. 
Now, the respiratory organs in the first class of the 
vertebrate, viz. the Mammalia, are of the most 
perfect kind, and perform their functions under 
very favourable circumstances, — the circulating 
fluid, at each inspiration, being brought into im- 



INTRODUCTION. 


35 


mediate contact with the oxygen of the air. Tl^e 
same is true in a still higher degree respecting 
birds. But the case is widely different with the 
two remaining classes. ' In reptiles the respiratory 
organs are themselves greatly deficient, compared 
with the same organs in the two higher classes; 
and in fishes the difference is still more conspi¬ 
cuous, inasmuch as they have no lungs at all, but 
gills, which execute their functions through the 
medium of water, their blood being thus acted 
upon only by the portion of oxygen which is con¬ 
tained in that fluid. From this diversity of struc¬ 
ture results, in the words of Cuvier, “ the four 
different kinds of motion for which the four classes 
of vertebrated animals are more particularly de¬ 
signed, quadrupeds, birds,” &c. 

Many specific characters distinguish these four 
classes of the vertebrates from each other, and espe¬ 
cially the two which constitute the extremes, viz. 
quadrupeds and fishes. The former are viviparous 
in their mode of reproduction, and suckle their 
young; which circumstance being peculiar to this 
division, they hence derive their ordinary appella¬ 
tion of Mammalia; a distinction the surest, as 
well as the most apparent, of all external charac¬ 
ters. The latter again are oviparous, and deposit 
the countless millions of their spawn in the shel¬ 
tered creek or the shallow brook. Quadrupeds 
are warm-blooded animals, having lungs contained 
in a regular chest, and are more or less covered 
with hair or wool to protect them from change of 


3(3 


INTRODUCTION. 


temperature; but fishes are cold-blooded, and their 
respiration is effected by branchiae, which consist of 
laminae, suspended on arches, between the head 
and body, through which the water entering by 
the mouth is allowed to escape, and so purifies the 
blood for renewed circulation. On their surface 
scales almost invariably take the place of the warm 
and woolly covering: and finally, for it is unneces¬ 
sary to carry the distinction farther, the former, as 
their name implies, move upon the earth with a 
firm tread, endowed with two limbs belonging to 
the anterior, and two to the posterior extremity; 
whilst fish are totally deprived of these, their only 
representatives being the fins, and they effect their 
movements through the liquid element mainly by 
means of their tail striking the water vertically and 
alternately from right to left. 

These general observations will suffice to enable 
our readers to understand distinctly the singular 
position which is occupied by the Cetacea in the 
classification of the animal kingdom. While they 
inhabit the water like fishes, and while in their 
mode of progression through their common ele¬ 
ment and in some of their more obvious external 
characters, they seem to claim kindred with the 
other inhabitants of the deep, yet, in every essen¬ 
tial respect, they are unequivocally marked as 
members not of this the fourth and last class, but of 
the first and most remote class of the vertebratae, viz. 
the Mammalia. Fish, as we have seen, are produced 
from spawn, and after the lapse of weeks or months, 


INTRODUCTION. 


37 

emerge from the gravel and the egg, where they 
had lain long neglected by the individuals who 
there deposited and deserted them; hut the whales 
are brought alive into the world, and the cub is 
nourished for months by its mother’s milk, and 
disports itself around her in playful affection, 
like the fawn or the lamb in the sunny glade. 
Fish are cold-blooded—their circulating fluid being 
only exposed to the water, in the gills; but the 
whale has no gills, nor any thing resembling them ; 
on the contrary, it has true lungs, in a great bony 
chest, into which the air is freely admitted—not 
indeed by the mouth, but by a peculiar apparatus 
to be afterwards explained, and through which the 
animal breathes the pure air of heaven like other 
mammalia, and is thus enabled to maintain the warm 
temperature of its body even in the midst of the 
icy seas. Fish never breathe ; and if removed 
from the water, and brought into the air, imme¬ 
diately die; whereas the Cetacea, if deprived of air 
and confined under water, are speedily and literally 
drowned. 

The Cetas, therefore, are not fishes, but true 
mammalia. Not only in their internal organization, 
but, to a great extent, in their osseous structure, 
they approximate to the quadrupeds or the mam¬ 
malia of the land; and it is not a little interesting 
to trace the wonderful adaptations by which an 
animal of such a structure and habit of body is 
fitted to become the inhabitant of a different element. 
Before we proceed, accordingly, to introduce the va- 


38 


INTRODUCTION. 


rious genera to the notice of our readers, we pro¬ 
pose to devote a chapter to the comparative anatomy 
of the order generally. By so doing we shall not 
only make our readers acquainted with the object of 
their study more effectually than it would be possible 
to do by any other means, but we shall prepare 
them for marking intelligently the specific differ¬ 
ences which we shall have occasion to point out as 
we advance in our survey. 

The classification which we have adopted with 
the view of exhibiting and treating the various 
species composing the Cetacea, will appear as we 
proceed. The series comprises a great variety of 
animals, descending from the greater whales to those 
of smaller dimensions, down to the porpoises and 
dolphins, some of which are not more than two feet 
in length. 

The fossile Cette which have been discovered 
form an interesting addition to the subject of our 
investigation. The examination and classification 
of these remains was one of the latest and most 
successful labours of the illustrious Cuvier, who 
informs us that the fossile marine mammalia, whose 
species it has been possible to characterise, are not 
less different from those which now inhabit our 
coasts, than are the terrestrial fossile mammifene 
distinct from those which now inhabit the land; 
and for some of them, he has been even under the 
neccessity of establishing entirely new genera. This, 
he adds, “ only more and more confirms the pro¬ 
position to which the examination of fossile shells 


INTRODUCTION. 


39 


had already led, that it is not land animals only 
which have undergone a change during the revolu¬ 
tions of the globe; but that the inhabitants of the 
ocean likewise, have not withstood their effects ; 
and that when the sea formed on our continents 
those prodigious deposits filled with shells which 
are now almost unknown, the great mammalia which 
it nourished were not those which people it at 
present; and that in spite of the strength which the 
immensity of their size apparently conferred upon 
them, they had no more power to resist the catas- 
trophies which disturbed their element, than had 
the elephant, the rhinoceroses, the hippopotami, &c. 
to withstand those upon land; and that in the 
absence of the arts of man, which, of course, could 
not be brought to bear against them, their races 
must have been exterminated by the general revo¬ 
lutions of nature alone.” (Oss. Foss. v. 398.) Many 
of the fossile varieties will be incorporated into our 
Survey, each being introduced in connexion with 
those genera and species with which it stands most 
nearly allied. 

We must not conceal from our readers that the 
ascertainment and description of the existing Ce¬ 
tacea is a work of great difficulty and uncertainty.— 
“ It is,” says Cuvier, “ concerning large animals that 
the greatest errors and confusion exists; and for this 
reason, that we can know and distinguish only those 
species which we can examine under our eye and 
carefully compare with each other; and this remark 
applies especially to the great Cetacea. They as- 


40 


INTRODUCTION. 


tonish every one by the immensity of their di¬ 
mensions, and their capture has for ages given 
employment to unwearied efforts of activity and 
courage; hut except under favourable circumstances, 
when occasionally stranded near some intelligent 
naturalist, they have scarcely ever been described 
with accuracy, and still less been minutely examined. 
Thousands of mariners have captured and cut up 
whales, who have never accurately examined one of 
them; and yet it is upon their vague descriptions and 
figures that zoologists have endeavoured to establish 
the natural history of these animals. The greater 
number of authors, moreover, have never endea¬ 
voured to exercise their critical powers in their 
compilations, inasmuch as they had but few ascer¬ 
tained facts as the basis of their reasonings. This is 
the true cause why the history of the Cetacea is so 
meagre, and yet so full of contradiction and repeti¬ 
tion. It would be truly an easy matter, by availing 
ourselves of the extraordinary figures which have 
been depicted, but which are the mere creatures of 
imagination and recollection, and also of the many 
confused and mutilated descriptions which have 
been published, and by accumulating synonyms 
which are mere copies of each other, to display long 
lists of species, but they would have no real existence 
in nature, and would altogether vanish before the 
slightest breath of criticism.” 

It may tend in some degree to illustrate the diffi¬ 
culties which are here so ably noticed, and to demon¬ 
strate their almost incredible extent, to state what 


INTRODUCTION. 


41 


has long been asserted, and never denied, that not¬ 
withstanding thousands of the Greenland whale 
have been annually captured by the subjects of many 
different nations, there never was an accurate repre¬ 
sentation of this species till it w r as supplied in 1809 
by our illustrious countryman, Scorseby ; and he, in 
his valuable work on the Arctic Regions, published 
‘ in 1820, states that Lacepede’s figure of the true 
whale has not its counterpart in nature ; and that 
his common narwhal never had any real existence. 
It is worthy of remark, that Lacepede’s interesting 
production has for long been the most popular 
treatise on the subject; and we regret to see that 
some of its worst errors of representation and de¬ 
scription have been copied into more recent works. 
Some of the figures, in these popular treatises, are 
no more like the animals they are meant to repre¬ 
sent, than a bull-dog is like a greyhound. Nor are 
the errors confined to the figure. They extend to 
whole genera. Loose and vague accounts of voyagers 
having been once incorporated into systematic works, 
an almost inextricable confusion has been introduced, 
which extorted from the capacious mind of Cuvier 
the exclamation,— 44 Toutes ces indications incom¬ 
plete ne serve cju’ a metre les naturalists a la torture 
and a man must himself go over the ground before 
he can feel the full force of the sentiment. Lesson 
gave utterance to his feelings on the point, in these 
words,— 44 What an impenetrable veil covers our 
knowledge of Cetacea! Groping in the dark, we 
advance in a field strewed with thorns.” There 


42 


INTRODUCTION. 


is doubtless then, to use the words of Scorseby, no 
branch of zoology so much involved as that which 
is entitled Cetology. Some idea of its difficulties 
may be formed, by considering that although Des- 
maret, in his Mammalogie (1820-22), enumerated 
sixty-two species, yet he considered no fewer than 
twenty-nine of them as doubtful and not established; 
and that Lesson, in 1828, out of eighty-four species 
which he classified, can vouch for the accuracy and 
existence of not more than fifty. 

We have thought it necessary to apprize the stu¬ 
dent, in these few words, of the difficulties in which 
the subject is even now involved, that he may per¬ 
ceive it is no easy matter at once to overcome them. 
From the grea’t rarity of favourable opportunties 
for examination, we must be cautious even in getting 
right ; and must hesitate ere we finally reject what 
has previously been admitted even on insufficient 
and objectionable grounds. Having said this much, 
we entirely dismiss this part of the subject. We 
indulge the hope, that our little Volume may be¬ 
come a vade mecum to many a mariner and fisher¬ 
man, and that beguiling over it the tedium of a sea 
voyage, he may thereby be excited to improve some 
of those opportunities which frequently present 
themselves to him, though not to us; and that by 
making pertinent and judicious observations, he 
may thus add to the stock of our interesting and 
important information. 

We now proceed to the comparative anatomy of 
the Cetacea. 


to tro /it p. 43 



PLATE I . 


Zncoy sc 

















































43 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 

OF THE 

CETACEA. 


It has been well remarked, that the most useful 
and ennobling view of natural history is unques¬ 
tionably that which gives the most exalted con¬ 
ception of the wisdom, goodness, and power of the 
Creator: and the branch of natural history best 
calculated to assist in tracing the works of nature 
up to nature’s God, is probably the physiology 
of animals. When we bear in mind that the 
Cetacea are mammalia, and yet inhabitants of the 
mighty deep, we may safely conclude that the 
mechanism displayed in the adaptation of their 
structure to their exigencies will superabound in ex¬ 
quisite design and infinite wisdom. Even externally, 
the changes which they undergo are interesting. 
The extremities are curiously and greatly modified. 
The upper is converted from an arm or fore foot 
into a fin, or swimming paw, as it is more accurately 
called; and though at first glance the difference 
between these two appears immense, yet when we 
examine their osseous structure, the real coincidence 



44 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


is truly striking. The sketches a and b , in Plate i., 
exhibit this paw in one of the herbivorous and in 
one x>f the ordinary Cetacea, when covered with 
their usual integuments, and c and d exhibit the 
same part when deprived of these appurtenances; 
both of these can easily be compared wfith the 
human arm, e, and the simple unity of their struc¬ 
ture, and the peculiar adaptation of each to its 
function, will, after this survey, scarcely require 
farther demonstration. We supply a sketch of the 
same part in the great whale of Greenland; and it 
is striking to observe, how much even this great fin 
supplies a representation of the osteology of the arm 
in man. And as with the anterior extremities, so 



it is with the posterior or sacral. In the whole 
Cetacea they become wholly rudimental, and leave 
scarcely a trace behind. The progress of the change, 
as seen externally, which w r e exhibit through three 
successive links of the animal series, is beautiful 
and interesting; sketch f shows them in the am¬ 
phibia—the seal ; sketch (/, in the herbivorous 
Cetacea—the Dugong of the East Indies; and 






OF THE CETACEA. 45 

sketch h, in the ordinary Cetacea, as in the common 
porpoise 

As already remarked, the tail of the Cetacea is 
peculiar; not vertical, as in fishes, but horizontal; 
by which great facility is given for their ascent to 
the surface, to which they must regularly resort for 
the discharge of the essential act of respiration. 
The agility of the lesser species, which they owe 
mainly to the tail, is universally known, and so 
powerful is it even in the most gigantic varieties, 
that by its means they frequently force themselves 
, entirely out of the water. This instrument of pro¬ 
digious power is formed by a concentration of the 
muscles and tendons on all sides of the vertebral 
column. Mr. Hunter remarks, that the mode in 
which the tail is constructed is, perhaps, as beauti¬ 
ful as to mechanism as any part of the animal; 
being principally composed of three layers of tendi¬ 
nous fibres. It comprises, in the larger species, in a 
single surface, from eighty to one hundred square 
feet: its length is only five or six, but its width is 
from eighteen to twenty-six. In its form it is flat 
and semilunar; its motions are rapid and universal; 
its strength immense. It is nearly the sole instru¬ 
ment of defence as well as of motion. The greatest 
velocity is produced by powerful strokes against 
the water impressed alternately upwards and down¬ 
wards, but a slower motion is produced by cutting 
the water laterally and obliquely downwards, in 
a similar manner as a boat is forced along by a 
single oar in the operation of skulling. So rapid 


46 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


is the progress of the order generally, that they 
not inappropriately have been denominated the 
birds of the sea. The fins again are generally 
stretched out in a horizontal position; and their 
chief application seems to be the balancing the 
animal; as the moment life is extinct it falls over 
upon its back. They appear also to be used in 
bearing off their young, and in turning and giving 
a direction to the velocity produced by the tail. 

But not only must the Cetacea regularly resort to 
the surface; it is a fact that they also descend into 
the unfathomable depths of the ocean, and then be¬ 
come exposed to a pressure which it is not easy to 
conceive, but which forces water through the pores 
of the hardest wood, so as to make it ever after¬ 
wards sink like lead in the abyss. Whales, there¬ 
fore, must be prepared to resist this pressure; and 
the integuments, though soft and flexible like the 
finest velvet, are so curiously constructed as to 
enable them effectually to do so. These, as in 
most other animals, are composed of three parts; 
1st, Of the epidermis or scarf-skin, which in addi¬ 
tion to its great smoothness, is remarkable for being- 
covered with a mucous oily fluid, which exudes 
from the whole surface, though in a manner diffe¬ 
rent from what we observe in fishes, which renders 
it remarkably slippery, and opposes every thing 
like maceration in water; 2dly, Of the rets mu- 
cosum, as it is called, which confers colour on 
the negroe and in all races of man, and also dis¬ 
tinctly in the whale tribe. Then succeeds, 3dly, ac- 


OP THE CETACEA. 


47 

cording to the common account, first the true skin, 
and then the lard or blubber ; the former is repre¬ 
sented as thick and strong, and the latter is held to 
correspond with the subcutaneous fat in other ani¬ 
mals. This is the view that naturalists generally, 
influenced probably by analogy, have taken; it is 
the view taken by Ray, Tyson, Pennant, Hunter, 
Scorseby, Cuvier, &c. But we believe, that accord¬ 
ing to this account, the great peculiarity of the struc¬ 
ture is disregarded, and the essential character, so 
much desiderated, is overlooked. According to Pro¬ 
fessor Jacob of Dublin, there is no distinction be¬ 
tween the true skin and the blubber, and the whole 
is nothing more than modified skin. But he shall 
speak for himself, u That structure in which the 
oil is deposited, denominated blubber, is the true 
skin of the animal, modified certainly for the pur¬ 
pose of holding this fluid oil, but still being the true 
skin. Upon close examination it is found to con¬ 
sist of an interlacement of fibres crossing each other 
in every direction as in common skin, but more open 
in texture, to leave room for the oil. Taking the hog 
as an example of an animal covered with an external 
layer of fat, we find that we can raise the true skin 
without any difficulty, leaving a thick layer of cel¬ 
lular membrane, loaded with fat, of the same nature 
as that in the other parts of the body; on the con¬ 
trary, in the whale it is altogether impossible to raise 
any layer of skin distinct from the rest of the blubber, 
however thick it may be; and in flensing a whale, 
the operator removes this blubber or skin from the 


48 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


muscular parts beneath, merely dividing with his 
spade the connecting cellular membrane.” (Dublin 
Phil. Journ. vol. i. 356.) Without prosecuting 
this point farther, we can only in a word say, that 
we doubt not that this is the more correct view, 
which, by the by, had previously been maintained 
both by Pallas and by Professor Giesecki; and it is 
interesting to see how, in the productions of nature, 
often apparently the smallest possible alteration 
effects the most wonderful change. This is very 
conspicuous here. A soft wrapper of fat, though 
double in thickness to that usually found in the 
Cetacea, could not have resisted the superincumbent 
pressure; whereas, by its being a modification of 
the skin, always firm and elastic, and, in this case, 
being never less than several inches, and some¬ 
times between one and two feet thick, it operates 
like so much caoutchic, possessing a density and 
resistance which the more it is pressed it resists the 
more. 

Other uses of this peculiarity of the skin wall 
readily suggest themselves to the readers mind. 
The order is warm blooded, and yet is exposed to 
the keenest cold in the deepest recesses of the 
frozen seas. Hence this wrapper, or blanket, as 
it has been appropriately called, being a bad con¬ 
ductor of caloric, will at once resist the surrounding 
cold and retain the animal heat. On this account 
alone, such an integument seems essential; its 
bulk and quantity is enormous, sometimes weighing 
thirty tons, which might appear sufficient to over- 


/ 


OF THE CETACEA. 49 

whelm the animal, and yet from being specifically 
lighter than the waters of the ocean, instead of 
oppressing, it buoys it up, and makes it relatively 
lighter, and so more active. 

The flesh or muscles of the Cetacea is not so 
much like that of fish as like that of beasts, more 
especially the stronger, such as the bull or horse; 
it is firm and, with some exceptions, coarse. The 
same remark may he made respecting their osseous 
structure ; in colour and solidity the hones resemble 
those of quadrupeds, though somewhat less compact; 
and they have no medullary cavity. The mammae 
in the herbivorous Cetacea are pectoral; in the 
ordinary, abdominal. Their milk is stated to be 
very rich, and according to Messrs. Jenner and 
Ludlow, is like cow’s milk to which cream has been 
added. (J. Hunter , in Phil. Trans, vol. lxxvii.446.) 

The internal structure is very much on the same 
model as that of the other mammalia, and this 
therefore is a sufficient reason for our not dilating 
upon it. Some differences, however, arise from the 
peculiarity of their circumstances, and on these we 
shall slightly touch. 

No circumstance connected with the economy of 
whales is more extraordinary than the long period 
during which they can suspend the vital function of 
respiration. In most of the mammalia the inhala¬ 
tions succeed each other with great rapidity, and 
cannot be suspended for more than a few instants. 
In man, for example, even when at rest, they occur 
every three seconds; whilst this interval in the Ce~ 

VOL. VI. D 


50 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


tacea is augmented many hundred and even thou¬ 
sand-fold ; for it is a fact, that the larger genera will 
remain an hour, and sometimes nearer two, under 
water. There must then he some essential pecu¬ 
liarity in their organization, to account for this ex¬ 
traordinary phenomenon; and yet we know not that 
any regular attempt at explanation has hitherto been 
made. It is with considerable hesitation, therefore, 
that we offer the following brief hints upon the 
point. 

Respiration is in a great degree subservient to the 
circulation of the blood: the stimulus to inspiration 
is the accumulation of this fluid in the lungs, which 
when purified proceeds to the heart, whence it is 
propelled through the frame for the purposes of se¬ 
cretion, &c.; after which it is again received into 
the veins, where it assumes its venous aspect, and 
is deprived of its arterial character. The circle thus 
described in man and the mammalia generally, is, 
so to speak, continuous and simple. In the Cetacea, 
however, it is not so; for in them the arterial 
portion, instead of being a simple and direct course 
to the venous, is complicated by the addition of a 
structure which we believe is peculiar to this order, 
and which is nothing less than a grand reservoir 
for the reception of a great quantity of arterial 
blood, which, as occasion requires, is emptied into 
the general circulation, and thus, for a time at 
least, supercedes the necessity of respiration. 

This structure was first noticed by John Hunter, 
and with his usual minute accuracy; Dr. Barclay 


OF THE CETACEA. 


51 


then described it as existing within the spinal canal 
of the white whale; more lately, Dr. Knox has 
observed it within the cranial cavity itself; whilst 
Messrs. Desmoulins and Breschet have noticed it in 
France. In a few words, we may describe it as a 
great irregular reservoir of arterial blood, contained 
within a plexus of arteries, deriving its blood from 
the vessels near the heart, which lines a large por¬ 
tion of the interior of the chest, insinuating itself 
between the ribs, forming a great cushion external 
to them near the spine, and also within the spinal 
canal and the cranium itself. Now it is this struc¬ 
ture which we believe has been, and which we 
would venture again to adduce, as offering a satis¬ 
factory explanation of the extraordinary fact under 
review. None of the authors named above have 
associated this remarkable structure with the no 
less remarkable phenomenon*; nor have they as¬ 
signed any other use to it. It would appear that 
these great vessels, or cylinders, as Mr. Hunter calls 
them, do not communicate directly with veins; 
nor are they formed of ramifications which commu- 

* Since writing the above, we have met with M. Dumeril’s 
Report (Ann. des Sc. Nat., 1834) of M. Breschet’s Paper on 
the Vascular System of the Cetacea, which bears the title of 
a Discovery in the Circulation, affecting the respiration of this 
order. We have in vain attempted to procure the Memoir 
itself. It was on the testimony of the Cyclopedia of Ana¬ 
tomy and Physiology for May, 1836, p. 577, that we stated 
that Mr. B.’s memoir contained “ no facts or physiological 
inferences additional to M. Hunter’s paper.” The discovery 
as to the structure is certainly and clearly no discovery at all; 
but it appears to us that M. Breschet has the merit of first 
assigning to it its true and very important use. 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


no 

\>+J 

nicate freely with each other, hut each may he 
followed to a great extent, and unravelled, as if 
twisted upon itself; and, upon the whole, we are 
free to allow that the suggestion of its use above 
afforded, presents itself to our view, as alike plau¬ 
sible, simple, and satisfactory. 

Mr. Hunter moreover remarked that the quan¬ 
tity of blood belonging to the whale tribe is pro¬ 
portionally very large, a circumstance which this 
reservoir at once explains; and M. Desmoulins 
states, that in the Cetacea the blood is at a higher 
temperature than in the terrestrial mammalia, rising 
as high as 104°. (Diet. Class. d’Hist. Nat.) Re¬ 
specting the Lungs , J. Hunter has also observed 
that they are more than usually elastic; the pulmo¬ 
nary cells, too, are unusually small, and communi¬ 
cate with each other in a way that is not generally 
seen, for by blowing into one branch of the trachea, 
not only the lobe to which the air directly goes, 
but the whole lungs, are inflated. (76. 418.) 

When we reflect, that in the Cetacea, respiration 
is carried on through the lungs, and that they 
inhabit the ocean, we shall at once perceive that a 
peculiar apparatus must be provided for the per¬ 
formance of this function. They have no nostrils, 
accurately so called, and their mouths are seldom 
opened in free air, and therefore the process is 
carried on by tubes which open on the summit 
of their head, and which are called the blow-holes 
or spiracles. In man and the other mammalia, 
the mouth and nostrils, as every one knows, termi- 


OF THE CETACEA. 


53 


nate posteriorly in a common pouch or hag, called 
the pharynx, from which both the windpipe and 
gullet take their origin; the former, and anterior, 
through an aperture called the glottis, which is 
covered by the epiglottis as a valve, which usually 
stands erect, but upon the passing of a morsel, shuts 
down like a lid, and so leaves a free passage for 
the food. In the Cetacea the spiracles admit free 
ingress and egress of air into and from the lungs; 
but as the mouth is at the same time usually filled 
with water, some mechanism must be provided to 
prevent it from rushing into these organs. The 
peculiarity then commences at this point. The 
epiglottis, instead of being a simple and usually 
unshut lid, forms in some of the Cetacea the anterior 
rim of the rima or slit, and in others encloses these 
parts at their base, and assists them in fonning a 
projecting tube or canal. In this particular there 
is great variety in the individual species; and, as a 
sample merely, we refer to sketches i and k, which 
exhibit the larynx in the common dolphin as 
sketched in the Encyclop. Metkodique , and in the sea 
unicorn, as represented by Dr. Fleming; in both of 
which it will be seen that the rima glottidis is on 
the summit of a projecting cone or pyramid. This 
is received into the lower end of the blowi ng-tube, 
wdiich is a circular aperture, surrounded with a 
strong sphincter muscle which includes the glottis 
in its grasp, thus uniting the windpipe and the 
blow-tube, which cross the fauces or swallow, and 
divide it into two passages. In some of the species 


54 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


there is an enlargement at the projecting end of 
the glottis, which would seem intended to prevent 
its retractation ; but this peculiarity does not exist 
in others. The union of the glottis with the lower 
aperture of the tube makes a kind of joint to admit 
of motion, and of dilatation and contraction in the 
floating palate, in swallowing, owing to the glottis 
moving more into or out of the tube. Immediately 
above the lower aperture, the tube becomes consider¬ 
ably larger, and proceeds upwards and forwards, 
through the bones and soft parts, till it reaches the 
summit of the head. The tube is usually divided 
by a septum into two canals, which in the first sub¬ 
division of the ordinary Cetacea open by two blow¬ 
holes, whilst in the second the septum ceases, and 
the tube terminates as it begins, by a single aperture. 
The whole of this singular mechanism is peculiar to 
the Cetacea. The other mammalia, when feeding, 
reside in a medium which, by means of their respi¬ 
ratory organs becomes the pabulum mice , whilst the 
Cetm in procuring sustinence are habitually under 
water, which were it to find entrance into their 
lungs, would prove as noxious as in man; and yet 
by a slight alteration in a few cartilages at the top 
of the windpipe, and in the direction of the air 
tubes, their feeding in the deep ocean is made as 
safe for them as that of the others in the balmy 
breeze. 

Regarding the voice of this order, it would ap¬ 
pear that we have not yet arrived at any definite 
conclusion. Mr. Scorseby states of the Greenland 


OF THE CETACEA. 


55 


whale that <e whales hare no voiceand this is 
generally applied to all the other species. There is, 
however, a difficulty in adopting this conclusion, 
from the amount of testimony which affirms that 
they hellow loudly, under certain circumstances. 
In proof of this we do not go hack to such state¬ 
ments as Anderson’s concerning the rorqual, or to 
the Abbe Lecoz’s regarding the sperm whale, or to 
the older voyagers, who often state that they heard 
them utter terrible cries, hut we shall come to more 
recent occurrences. In January 1812, some fishers 
of Paimpol observing a number of small whales of 
the porpoise genus at some distance from shore, 
supplied themselves with arms and gave chase, en¬ 
deavouring to drive them towards the shore. They 
succeeded in frightening them, and hunted one of 
the smallest of them from the deep. When stranded 
in shallow water it began to utter cries, which 
speedily brought others, among the first of which 
its mother was supposed to be one. She, however, 
w T as accompanied with many; the cries were aug¬ 
mented according as the number of those in peril 
was increased, and finally they all, to the number of 
seventy, violently precipitated themselves among the 
shallows and were taken. Cuvier, who received the 
details of this occurrence and published them (Ann. 
du Museum , tom. xix. 1.), subjoins the following 
remark : “ As to their power of uttering cries and 
bellowings, more or less acute, we cannot, after the 
assertions which have been made by those who 
heard them, any longer entertain a doubt.” Is it 


56 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


not from this power of uttering cries, that the Melos 
of Dr. Trail has received the popular name of 
caing , that is calling v T hale? The statements of 
the fishermen regarding it entirely agree with what 
has just been stated respecting the Griseus , viz. 
that no sooner is one of their numerous flocks in 
danger of being stranded, than it utters vehement 
cries, w r hich being heard by the rest, they come to 
its relief, and usually share its dangers. We shall 
add another and not less pertinent statement on the 
respectable authority of Orbigny, regarding some 
animals stranded on the coast of La Vendee in 
1822. “ In the month of June many of the inhabi¬ 
tants of Aiguillon were aroused at eleven p. m. by a 
dreadful noise which apparently proceeded from the 
sea-shore, and which they compared to the bellowing 
of a hundred bulls. Some of the most courageous 
among them went to discover what it was ; but, ter¬ 
rified with the extraordinary noise, more appalling 
during the silence of night, and increased by heavy 
blows on the land and sea, they returned to their 
homes. When day appeared they saw four great 
animals (it was thought there had been others) 
struggling with death, and uttering frightful cries.” 

Is it, we would enquire, that this noise is wholly 
connected with the blowing apparatus, or may not 
these Cetacea, in the circumstances stated, have 
produced it through the windpipe and mouth, an¬ 
swering to the voice in other mammalia ? But, how¬ 
ever this may be, a still more important point is 
brought by the circumstance under consideration. 


OF THE CETACEA. 


57 

If in any way they can produce a loud noise in air, 
what is to hinder them from doing the same under 
water ? And if they have this faculty at all, then, 
according to well known accoustic principles, would 
not the sound he heard better, and conveyed farther 
than in air; and would not this satisfactorily explain 
the fact so often stated, that they have some myste¬ 
rious mode of intercommunication under water, to 
the extent in the sperm whale, according to Beale, 
of four, five, and even seven miles, of which no 
explanation, so far as we know, has hitherto been 
attempted ? We venture to throw out this idea for 
the consideration of those who have better oppor¬ 
tunities of judging than ourselves. It would pro¬ 
bably require a more minute knowledge of the wind¬ 
pipe and neighbouring parts, ere we can minutely 
explain the mode in which these cries are uttered, 
and this voice, so to call it, exerted. 

We need scarcely remark, that it is the apparatus 
above alluded to that has procured for the order the 
popular name of blowers , which is applicable to all the 
ordinary Cetae. Their spoutings or jets cl'eau , as they 
have been called, are heard as well as seen at a 
great distance, as much as two and three miles, and 
rise sometimes as high as twenty or thirty feet. It 
was for long supposed that this appearance was 
chiefly owing to the water which they take in with 
their food, and which, if swallowed, would only op¬ 
press them. But in opposition to this, it has more 
recently been maintained, that the proper egress of 
the water is the same as its ingress, and that by 


58 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


contracting the surrounding muscles, the throat and 
mouth can easily be cleared of the fluid. The spi¬ 
racles, moreover, have a secretion peculiar to them¬ 
selves ; and it is now the fashionable opinion among 
naturalists, that it is especially this secretion, toge¬ 
ther with the superfluous vapour of the lungs, which, 
along with the expired breath, forms the proper 
substance of the projected column. This is the 
opinion maintained, among others, by Scorseby and 
Blainville, certainly weighty names. Notwithstand¬ 
ing this, we venture to express doubts whether 
the point is either definitely or satisfactorily esta¬ 
blished. It would appear there is an allowed dif¬ 
ficulty, arising from the great quantity of the fluid 
frequently expelled ; which is met by the statement, 
that sometimes the ejected air comes in contact with 
some supernatant water, and raises quantities along 
with it. With a perfect cognizance of these opinions, 
however, we find that M. Lesson, from much per¬ 
sonal observation, dissents from this opinion, and, 
as late as 1828, maintains the old and now often 
scouted explanation. He states that, from having 
often seen the phenomenon, and frequently within 
the distance of a few yards, he feels constrained to 
oppose the prevailing view. He observes of the 
sperm whale, that when only breathing, and not 
feeding, it has no jets at all; and that, when feeding 
and taking in water, it then expels some through its 
spiracles, though to no great height; whilst in other 
whales, the projected column long retains the appear¬ 
ance of a united stream, mounting high before it 


OF THE CETACEA. 


59 


falls down again in a shower. ( Cetaces , 308.) 
Amidst these conflicting statements we are the less 
surprised to find another opinion which embraces, if 
it does not quite reconcile, the other two. Thus 
Quoy and Gaimard, though theyagree with Scorseby, 
that possibly no water may sometimes be expelled 
during expiration, yet having often observed that 
during stormy weather the jets took place both 
more frequently and more abundantly, account for 
the fact on the supposition, that as it is then that 
the Cetacea feed most freely, the projecting of the 
water takes place chiefly when they are engaged in 
this important process. These naturalists go fur¬ 
ther ; “ the habits of the smaller Cetse,” they main¬ 
tain, “ supply a convincing proof against the opinion 
of Mr. Scorseby; for beyond doubt, if the jet was 
composed only of air and condensed mucus, the 
porpoises on our coasts would emit this vapour in a 
similar way, according to their size; and yet this 
is not the case. Those who inhabit the sea-coasts 
and great rivers, when sufficiently near, hear these 
animals make a great noise,—to grunt like a porpoise, 
is a proverb among sailors, but they never see any 
apparent jet from the blow-hole.” (Zoologie de 
VUranie , p. 80. J Desmoulins expresses his opinion 
in these words,—“It is not water, but mucosity, 
which is expelled by the blow-holes during expira¬ 
tion ; the animal spouts water only after deglutition, 
or in the moments of rage.” (Diet. Classique.) This 
two-fold view of the matter has been adopted by an 
eminent British naturalist, as late as the year 1831. 


60 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


He states, the apparatus is used for getting rid of 
the superfluous water from the mouth, and that this 
takes place as well under water as on the surface. 
“ As often as the whale opens its enormous jaws, 
its mouth of course immediately fills with water; 
but it is only the fish, fuci, or small marine ani¬ 
mals, ‘ unsafe within the wave of such commotion/ 
that are actually swallowed. The water itself is 
partly regurgitated and partly made to pass upwards, 
and by a peculiar and very admirable mechanism is 
thrown out by the blow-holes. When the animal 
breathes on the surface, a moist vapour, mixed with 
mucus, is exhaled; but no water is thrown up, 
unless the expiration is made beneath the waves, or 
the creature itself is either in a sportive mood, or 
under the influence of rage or terror.” (Illustra¬ 
tions of Zoology by James Wilson , vol. ii.) 

Are we then to understand, that occasionally the 
mucosity only is discharged, and that sometimes 
again this is mixed with water ? Among other ar¬ 
guments that are used against this latter alternative, 
Blainville states ( Nouv. Diet. Hist. Natur. tom. xix.) 
that the construction of the parts does not admit of 
the ingress of water. This is a point to be ascer¬ 
tained. Is it true that such a peculiarity of con¬ 
struction exists in all the genera; and that they 
have no power to use it for both purposes as occasion 
may require ? Our own observations, grounded upon 
the examination of several genera, would lead us to 
answer that they had this power. In the meanwhile 
we remark, that as the mechanism is different in 


OF THE CETACEA. 


61 


almost every genus, so the blowing is different in 
most of them; and to such an extent, that we believe 
an experienced observer could, even at .a distance, 
determine the variety at any particular time in sight; 
and the utility of this to the whalers need not be 
insisted upon. When describing the genera, w T e 
shall, as far as our materials enable us, point out 
these minute peculiarities. 

One general remark, however, may here be pre¬ 
mised, viz. that the blowing is most conspicuous in 
the largest genera, very marked also in those of inter¬ 
mediate dimensions, "while in the smaller it is seldom 
or ever visible at all. Thus Lesson remarks, “ we 
have examined for hours many different species of 
dolphins sporting around the vessel, without wit¬ 
nessing the slightest column of water, or of vapour, 
being projected from the blow-holes.” (Zool . de la 
Loquille , p. 1770 And so Quoy and Gaimasd, 
“ the dolphins very rarely spout; w r e were going to 
say never, because we have never seen it, but that 
Spallanzani states that he "witnessed it whilst pass¬ 
ing from Lipari to Stromboli, and Humboldt men¬ 
tions he saw it in porpoises, in the fresh water, 
three hundred leagues from the mouth of the Ori- 
nocco.” (Zoologie de VUranie , p. 7^0 And this 
would appear to arise not only from their inferior 
size and energy, but also from a difference in the 
construction of the apparatus, which we do not 
think has been pointed out. * In the smaller va¬ 
rieties the parts seem to be much less muscular; 
and hence, though quite efficient for all the purposes 


62 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


of life, they rarely produce visible spoutings, but 
carry on respiration in a manner more nearly re¬ 
sembling animals, not inhabitants of the water. 

After “ their spoutings are out,” to avail ourselves 
of the expressive phraseology of the whalers, most 
of the Cetee, as we have already stated, descend 
into the depths of the ocean, where they are some¬ 
times exposed to the pressure of one hundred and 
fifty-four atmospheres, equal to about a ton upon 
each square inch. We have seen how this pressure 
is met, by a peculiarity of the integuments over 
the whole surface of the body ; it now remains 
to state how the delicate apparatus we have just 
described is defended from danger from the same 
cause. The external opening of the blow-holes is 
in some of the larger species an opening or slit of a 
foot in length, the tube itself is of large dimensions, 
and the chest is a great chamber of air: by what 
means then is water prevented, under this immense 
pressure, from entering the lungs and so destroying 
the animals ? We answer: It is mainly by a set of 
valves which act upon the same principle in all the 
genera, but’which are varied in each, by a number 
of contrivances equally extraordinary, beautiful, and 
efficient. We shall illustrate this remark by epito¬ 
mizing a short portion of Pallas’ excellent ac¬ 
count of the apparatus in the Beluga or white 
whale. The blow-hole opens in the most elevated 
part of the head, and this opening is circumscribed 
by a double arch. The skin is drawn towards this 
orifice, and forms over it in front a soft papillary 


OF THE CETACEA. 


63 


valve, which may he compared to an epiglottis, 
and which prevents the entrance of foreign bodies. 
The skin over the valve is scarcely two lines thick, 
but internally it envelopes a projecting body, which 
is about two inches thick, and which is composed 
of a network of tendinous fibres hard as wood, and 
which can scarcely be cut with a knife. A similar 
network of tendinous fibres, arranged in circles, 
forms, in this situation, the external wall of the 
blowing canal; and two strong muscles rising from 
the frontal bone, and peculiar to the canal, acting on 
these bodies, most effectually shuts them down, and 
thus secures the canal. It is an apparatus to which 
there is nothing similar in any of the other mam¬ 
malia. We shall, on this interesting point, likewise 
avail ourselves of the interesting descriptions and 
sketches of Scorseby. In the true whale, he remarks, 
the first impression of each blow-hole on the upper 
part of the skull is marked by an oblong cavity 
(see 1, sketch l. Plate i. representing the upper sur¬ 
face of the anterior part of the whale’s skull, the 
skin and fat being removed), winch is the seat of a 
muscular substance attached by its anterior extremity 
to the surface of the skull, and also attached by its 
posterior and inferior extremity to the interior of 
the skull, at some depth in the blowing canal 1, 1, 
sketch m. The part of this muscle which pene¬ 
trates the bony canal is of a conical form, the apex 
downwards, or within, represented at 2, in figure 
?/ 2 , which is a vertical section of the skull ; so that 
when this interior portion contracts, the muscular 


64 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


cone is drawn tight into the orifice, and completely 
closes the breathing canal 1, 1; while on the other 
hand, the action of the external part of the muscle 
draws the conical plug forward and upwards, and 
affords a free passage for the air in respiration. This 
beautiful structure it is which enables the animal, 
under the immense pressure to which it is sometimes 
exposed, to exclude the sea-water from its lungs: so 
far from the water being forced down the canals, the 
enormous load serves only more effectually to press 
down and close the valves that defend the passages 
to the lungs. (Journal of a Voyage , &c. 152.) 

To this we may add, that in those genera in 
which the external aperture to the ear is not covered 
by the common integuments, there is a valve placed 
in the passage to guard against the pressure of 
water upon the drum of the ear, whereby it would 
be broken and the organ of hearing destroyed. 
Mr. Scorseby’s words, in relation to the Mysticetus, 
are,—there is an elegant appearance found near 
the external opening, in the shape of a little plug, 
like the end of the finger, which is inserted in a cor¬ 
responding cavity in the interior of the canal, by a 
slight motion of which the opening can either be 
effectually shut, for the exclusion of water, or un¬ 
closed for the admission of sound : and M. Orbigny 
remarks, upon four of the P. Griseus which he had 
an opportunity of examining, “ the external orifice of 
the ear was shut by a very fine valve which appeared 
to have the power of opening a.ad shutting at the 
animal’s will.” (F. Cuviers Hist., &c. 185.) 


OP THE CETACEA. 


65 


The only other part of the animal to which we 
shall at present advert is the nervous system , which, 
from its vast importance on the hahits and character 
of the living being, must ever be regarded with in¬ 
terest. It would appear that the observations made 
on this point are still by much too few to enable us 
to come to any thing like general results; and in 
systematic writers, we meet with the utmost contra¬ 
riety of statement. Thus Cuvier, in his Lectures 
{Comp. Anat. ii. 265), judging from the limited op¬ 
portunities which at that time had come within his 
reach, speaks of the brain of the Cetacea generally, as 
distinguished for its great breadth and height; whilst 
Lesson, on the other hand, states that it is always 
very small in relation to the size of the animals 
(Cetaces, 23). The truth appears to lie between 
these two opinions, and to have been expressed 
by Hunter when he says, “ the size of the brain 
differs much in different genera of the tribe, and 
likewise in the proportion it bears to the bulk of 
the animal.” (Loc. cit., p. 423.) It will probably 
require a distinct examination of each species before 
certainty is attained. From the present state of 
our knowledge, it would appear that the larger 
varieties have very small brains in proportion to 
the size of their bodies, whilst the smaller kinds 
again have very large and well developed brains. 
In regard to the mysticetus , Mr. Scorseby states, 
from actual examination of at least one specimen, 
that the brain lies in a small cavity in the upper and 
back part of the skull; its general appearance is 
VOL. VI. E 


66 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


not unlike that of other mammalia, hut its smallness 
is remarkable. In a young specimen, 19 feet long, 
which weighed 11,200 pounds, the brain weighed 
only 3 pounds 12 ounces, which is only one three 
thousandth part of the whole animal; whilst in man 
it is calculated to weigh one thirty-fifth part. In 
a young rortrata , which measured 17 feet, Mr. 
Hunter found that the brain weighed 4 pounds 8 
ounces; and Mr. Delalande reports that in a rorqual , 
nearly 80 feet long, the brain filled only a cavity 
which measured 13 inches by 9. On the other 
hand, Cuvier states, from five examinations of the 
porpoise and dolphin, that on the average the brain 
weighed one sixty-third part of the whole. This 
statement, regarding these smaller groups, is corro¬ 
borated by Tyson, who in his Anatomy of the 
Porpoise remarks that the brain is large, its figure 
somewhat short, but what it wants in length it has 
in breadth; Ray observes that the largeness of the 
brain, and its correspondence to man’s, argues this 
creature to be of more than ordinary wit and capa¬ 
city; and Tiedemann, the highest living authority 
in this department, remarks, “ that the brain of the 
dolphin is distinguished from that of monkies by 
its great size and developement; and, next to the 
brain of the orang-outang, approaches nearest, in this 
respect, to the human brain.” We here introduce a 
sketch of Tiedemann s plate of the base of the brain 
in the dolphin, in illustration of his remark; and add, 
that considering the marked effect which the relative 
size of this important organ generally has on the 


OF THE CETACEA. 


character of the animal, it seems desirable that 
every opportunity should he embraced to accumu¬ 
late accurate information on the point. 



There is nearly an equal paucity of facts concern¬ 
ing the senses of this order. First, in relation to 
that of smell. Among the early fishermen and sys¬ 
tematic writers this faculty was conceded, in the 
highest possible perfection, to the whole tribe. Thus 
Anderson, in his excellent account of Iceland and 
Greenland, narrates that the inhabitants of the 
Ferroe isles, when they perceived that their boats 
were pursued by the sperm whale, which, according 
to him, is a very dangerous species, used to throw 
some castor overboard, which made him sink to the 
bottom like a stone. Ginger was celebrated for 
similar virtues, and the blood of animals still more 
so. Chalk and sulphur had still greater powers, for 
no fish would come near a vessel freighted with 
these articles; and such opinions are very prevalent 
with sailors up to the present time. The comparative 







68 COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 

anatomists seem to have been the first to throw out 
difficulties in the way of this belief, by discovering 
that in the majority of the species the olfactory 
nerve does not exist, and that there is no opening 
in the skull by which that nerve can pass. Cuvier s 
words, in 1823, are,—in the Cetacea there is an 
absence of the olfactory nerve and the usual organs 
of smell. (Os. Foss. v. 235; see too, Comp. Anat. 
vol. ii. 683). Ray and Rondelitius were aware of 
this fact as it respects the dolphin, yet the latter of 
these authors still maintains that it has a very acute 
sense of smell, “ as Aristotle testifies and experience 
manifestsa conclusion in which few, now-a-days, 
will be inclined to follow him. The same deficiency 
has been ascertained respecting the porpoise genus ; 
and Cuviers words are,—“ probably the other Ce¬ 
tacea likewise want them, as they have no sethmoidal 
holes.” (Comp. Anat. ii. 199.) This, however, 
only shows the danger of reasoning from ana¬ 
logy in this order of animals, whose differences ap¬ 
pear to be endless. “ I believe,” says Mr. Hunter, 
“ the olfactory nerve is peculiar to the mysticetus and 
rorqual ,—the large and small whalebone whales” 
(Loc. Cit. 429) ; and such an observation was more 
than sufficient to set the ingenuity of this extra¬ 
ordinary man to work. How do animals smell ? 
have aromata any other vehicle than air ? how can 
water be smelt ? and according to him, water, in 
the Cetacea, never comes into contact with the 
sinuses in which their olfactory nerves are dis¬ 
tributed ; and their perceiving smells, through the 


OP THE CETACEA. 


69 


medium of air, could be of no service when feed¬ 
ing in the depths of the ocean. These are some of 
the interesting questions that occurred to the mind 
of J. Hunter, and on which he dwells; though we 
cannot say that even his ingenuity has settled them. 
Lesson states that the olfactory nerve is wholly 
absent in the sperm whale (17) ; and Mr. Knox, in 
his account of the great rorqual, states, that this 
nerve is large. The prevailing opinion, therefore, 
now is, that the sense of smell is possessed by 
the true whales and the rorquals, and is wanting in 
all the rest. (See Diet. Class. d’Hist. Nat. Art. 
Baleine.) We much doubt, however, if this should 
be regarded in any other light than an approxima¬ 
tion to the truth. 

The organ of vision in the Cetacea appears usually 
to be very small, in relation to the size of the animal ; 
Cuvier has made this remark with regard to all 
large animals, and especially the Cetacea. Notwith¬ 
standing the enormous bulk of the larger whales, 
their eye is stated not to exceed in size that of an ox. 
(See Arct. Reg. i. 456). In the beluga examined by 
Dr. Barclay, which measured between thirteen and 
fourteen feet, the eye is stated to be not so large as 
in man (Wern. Trans, iii. 393); and as it regards 
the porpoise, Tyson states, that it is not so large as 
the sheep’s (199). In some species again, it appears 
to be proportionably larger. Thus Quoy and Gai- 
mard state, that in the rorqual which they examined 
in the Falkland islands, about fifty-five feet long, the 
eye was five inches in the long diameter and four 



COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


70 

in the short. In Dr. Knox’s great rorqual the organ 
is placed very far back in the head, obliquely above 
and behind the angle of the mouth, and near to that 
part of the animal which corresponds with its greatest 
breadth, so that by the simple motion of the eye it 
commands a wide range of vision. Cuvier has re¬ 
marked that its axis of vision is directed obliquely 
downwards, so that it may at all times the more 
readily perceive its food as it floats below it; and, ac¬ 
cording to Scorseby, the sense of seeing is acute, since 
whales are observed to discover one another in clear 
water, when under the surface, at an amazing dis¬ 
tance. He at the same time states, that when on 
the surface, the mysticetus does not see far. On the 
other hand, it has been remarked, that the sperm 
whale, when above the surface, appears to view 
objects very readily which are placed in a direct 
line with the eye; its common mode of looking at a 
boat or ship being to turn over on its side, so as to 
cause the rays from the object to strike directly 
upon the retina. When alarmed, and anxious to 
take as rapid a glance as possible on all sides, it as¬ 
sumes a perpendicular position in the water, with its 
head protruding above the surface and the eye di¬ 
rected to the object (Beales Obs. on the Sperm 
Whale), This practice, as null subsequently appear, 
is not confined to the sperm whale. 

The organ of hearing in the Cetm is in many 
respects peculiar. It resembles considerably the 
mechanism in fishes, though in various particulars 
it approaches more or less to that of land animals. 


OF THE CETACEA. 71 

Being aquatic in their habit, the organ must espe¬ 
cially have a reference to the laws of sound as con¬ 
nected with their native element; and yet several of 
the species seem so formed as to receive impressions 
conveyed through air. None of them have the ex¬ 
ternal auricular appendages which are common in 
the other mammalia ; neither have they any osseous 
meatus opening; their external meatus is nothing 
more then a very slender cartilaginous canal, which 
commences sometimes at, and much more frequently 
beneath, the surface of the skin, and takes a ser¬ 
pentine direction as it passes through the subja¬ 
cent parts to reach the drum of the ear. In the 
Sperm whale the external opening would admit a 
small writing quill. After the examination of the 
young mysticetus , Mr. Scorseby remarks, the opening 
of the passage is so small as not to be easily dis^- 
covered; in the sucking whale it was only one-sixth 
of an inch in diameter (Journal , &c. 154 ); and 
yet at a previous period he had stated that no orifice 
for the admission of sound can be discovered in 
the Greenland whale until the skin is removed. 

(Arct . Reg. i. 456). There is here a discrepancy 
in the statements of this generally accurate and ac - 
complished author; and on the authority of the 
latter passage, it is usually stated that the mysticetus 
has no external aperture. In the beluga which 
was examined by Dr. Barclay, no external opening 
could be discovered, nor was any found in the tooth¬ 
less whale of Havre, fifteen feet long, examined 
by Blainville; nor in any of the seventy globiceps , 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


72 

which, were stranded in Brittany in 1812; nor in 
a rorqual , fifty-eight feet long, examined near 
Rochefort by M. Souty; and the same is true 
of a narwhal and dolphin , we have had an op¬ 
portunity of examining. The internal ear is quite 
as peculiar, in that it is scooped out of a particular 
bone forming no portion of the usual cranial bones, 
and is attached to them only by ligaments. In 
several of the order, the eustachian tube opens high 
up in the blowing canal, answering, as we have 
seen, to the nose ; and through this it evidently 
must be that the animal hears any sound that is 
communicated through the air: it is with this tube 
also that these cavities communicate, in which it is 
alleged that the nerves of smelling are situated; so 
that it is with some show of truth that it has been 
stated of the genera so organized, that they hear 
by the nose and smell by the ear. Tiedemann re¬ 
marks, regarding the dolphin , “ perhaps the most 
remarkable nerve for its great relative size is the 
acoustic, which testifies to the delicate sense of 
hearing in it.” 

The two remaining senses, taste and touch, seem 
to be possessed by the Cetacea in a very inferior 
degree, and concerning these we shall not now stop 
to make any observations. 

The mental faculties of the Cetae, so far as ob¬ 
servations have been made on this very obscure 
point, appear to vary greatly in the different genera ; 
for which reason we shall reserve all remarks on 
this subject till we come to treat of the different 


OF THE CETACEA. 


73 

genera in detail. We shall do the same with regard 
to the dispositions manifested by the various species, 
which must he learnt in connexion with their in¬ 
dividual history. We may here, however, notice 
one point in which they seem all to agree, viz. 
the reciprocal regard they manifest for each other. 
This is common more or less to them all, whether 
as it regards the mother and her young, or the 
cub and its parents, or the several members of the 
same family or shoal. This amiable trait in the 
character of the whole order, is quaintly hut beauti¬ 
fully illustrated in the following lines of the old 
poet, Waller, which hear intrinsic marks of being a 
delineation from nature. In his Battle of the 
Sommer Islands, we are informed that two whales, 
an old and young one, were embayed in the shal¬ 
lows ; and the following scenes were enacted. 

The bigger whale like some high carack lay, 

Which wanteth sea-room with her foes to play: 

This sees the cub, and does himself oppose 
Betwixt his cumber’d mother and her foes: 

With desperate courage he receives her wounds. 

And men and boats his active tail confounds ; 

Their forces joined, the seas with billows fill, 

And make a tempest, though the winds be still. 

Now would the men with half their hoped-for prey 
Be well content; and wish this cub away : 

Their wish they have; he (to direct his dam 
Unto the gap through which they thither came) 

Before her swims, and quits the hostile lake, 

A prisoner there, but for his mother’s sake: 

She, by the rocks compell’d to stay behind 
Is by the vastness of her bulk confined.— 


74 


COMPARATIVE ANATOMY 


They shout for joy! And now on her alone 
Their fury falls, and all their darts are thrown; 
Their fixed jav’lins in her sides she wears, 

And on her back a grove of pikes appears. 

Roaring, she tears the air with such a noise 
As well resembled the conspiring voice 
Of routed armies when the field is won, 

To reach the ears of her escaping son. 

He, though a league removed from the foe, 

Hastes to her aid:— 

The men amaz’d, blush’d to observe the seed 
Of monsters human piety exceed! 

Their courage droops, and hopeless now they wish 
For composition with th’ unconquer’d fish ; 

Not daring to approach their wounded foe, 

Whom her courageous son protected so.— 

The rising tide, ere long, their efforts aid. 

And to the deep a passage for them made ; 

And thus they parted with exchange of harms, 

Much blood the monsters lost, and they—their arms. 


We now proceed to the survey of the several 
genera in their order; and in doing so, we beg to 
remind our readers that the whole order is divided 
into two great tribes, the Ordinary and Herbivorous 
Cetacea. The former is distinguished chiefly by 
being more pisciform in its appearance, and entirely 
so in its habits; ranging throughout the depths of 
the ocean, and feeding upon the usual prey of 
fishes; whilst the latter, though wholly aquatic, 
approximates to the amphibia, and resides at the 
estuaries of rivers, there feeding on the vegetables 
which grow on the shores and shallows. The former, 



OP THE CETACEA. 


75 

too, is by much the most numerous and varied, 
being in fact one of the largest tribes which exists 
in nature. 

Some further division, therefore, becomes indis¬ 
pensable. The first and most important group has, 
by Cuvier and others, been distinguished by a very 
striking peculiarity, viz. the enormous size of the 
head, which, according to common apprehension, 
appears disproportionate, extending to a fourth, and 
even a third, of the dimensions of the whole frame. 
Under this first subdivision we class the Common 
or Greenland Whale, the Rorquals, and the Sper¬ 
maceti Whales. The two former of these have no 
teeth whatever, but whalebone or baleen only; and 
the Sperm Whale has no baleen, and has teeth in 
the lower jaw only. 


76 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 

PLATE II. 

Balaena Mysticetus, Linn .—Common Whale, Bonnaterre ; Let- 
cepede .—Greenland or right Whale of Scorseby and the 
Northern Fishers_Balaena Borealis, Lesson. 

As we owe our knowledge of this valuable animal 
principally to the investigations of Scorseby, it will 
only be doing justice to this eminent navigator, as 
well as conferring a favour upon our readers, to em¬ 
body in our account an abstract of his excellent de¬ 
scription (Arctic Reg. vol. i. 449—478). 

It is this interesting animal which is the object of 
the important commerce to the Polar Seas; it is pro¬ 
ductive of more oil than any other of the Cetacea, 
and being less active, slower in its motions, and 
more timid than any other of the order of similar 
magnitude, it is more easily captured. 

In former times there was much exaggeration 
as to the size of this whale, eighty and one hun¬ 
dred feet being assigned as a frequent size, and one 
hundred and fifty and two hundred feet as not un¬ 
common. Some of the ancient naturalists stated 
that it attained even a much greater length. Prom 
the researches, however, of Scorseby, it seems irre- 


GREENLAND WHALE 



POTT Ell 
































































■ 











THE GREENLAND WHALE. 77 

fragably established that the mysticetus at no time 
ever exceeds sixty-five or seventy feet.* He him¬ 
self was personally concerned in the capture of three 
hundred and twenty-two, not one of which exceeded 
sixty feet. He adds, that an uncommon whale 
which was caught near Spitzbergen, the whalebone 
of which measured almost fifteen feet, was not so 
much as seventy feet in length; and the largest ac¬ 
tual measurement he has met with is that given by 
the late Sir Charles Giesecki, who states that in 
1813 a whale was killed at Godhaven of the length 
of sixty-seven feet. Its greatest circumference is 
from thirty to forty feet. 

When fully grown, therefore, the length may be 
stated as varying from fifty to sixty-five, or very 
rarely seventy feet. It is thickest a little behind the 
fins (see PI. n.), near the middle of its whole length, 
whence it gradually tapers in a conical form towards 
the tail, and slightly towards the head. The head is 
remarkably large, as is the case with the two suc¬ 
ceeding genera, forming nearly one-third of the 
whole bulk. The under part, the outline of which 
is given by the jaw-bone, is flat, and measures from 
sixteen to twenty feet in length, and from ten to 
twelve in breadth. The lips, of corresponding di¬ 
mensions, go to enclose the cavity of the mouth in 
a very striking way. The upper jaw, including the 
crown-bone, is bent down at its edges, like a boat 
upside down, so as to shut in the front and upper 
parts of the cavity of the mouth. When the mouth 
* See Edin. Phil. Joum. vol. i. 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 


78 

is open, it presents a cavity as large as a room, and 
capable of containing a ship's jolly-boat full of men, 
being fifteen or sixteen feet long, ten or twelve high, 
and six or eight wide. 

The mysticetus has no dorsal fin. The two pec¬ 
torals are placed about two feet behind the angle 
of the mouth, and are about nine feet long and five 
broad. They cannot be raised above the horizontal 
position; and hence the account given by some 
naturalists that by them the whale supports its 
young on its back, must be erroneous. The tail is 
horizontal; its form is flat and semilunar, indented 
in the middle ; the two lobes are somewhat pointed, 
and turned a little backwards. 

The eyes, which, according to Sir Charles Giesecki 
and Mr. Scorseby, are not much larger than those of 
an ox, and with a white iris, are situated in the sides 
of the head, about a foot obliquely above and behind 
the angle of the mouth. The sense of seeing is 
acute in the water, when clear; not so, however, in 
air. On the most elevated part of the head, about 
sixteen feet from the anterior extremity of the jaw, 
are situated the blow-holes, consisting of two longi¬ 
tudinal apertures, very similar to the holes in the 
body of a violin, from eight to twelve inches in 
length. 

The mouth, in place of teeth, contains two exten¬ 
sive rows of baleen, commonly called whalebone, 
suspended from the upper jaw and sides of the 
crown-bone. The plates of baleen are generally 
curved longitudinally, and give an arched form to 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 79 

the roof of the mouth. They enclose the tongue 
between their lower extremities, and are themselves 
covered by the lower lip. There are upwards of 
three hundred of these plates on each side of the jaw, 
resembling a frame of saws in a saw-mill; they 
are longest in the middle, whence they gradually 
diminish away to nothing both in front and behind : 
ten or twelve feet is their usual length. In the 
youngest whales, called suckers, the baleen is only a 
few inches long; when the length reaches six feet 
or upwards, the whale is said to be size: a large 
whale sometimes yields a ton of baleen. 

As the formation of the baleen is curious, and 
forms the most striking peculiarity in this and the 
next genus, we shall supply some details concern¬ 
ing its formation, principally taken from the account 
of Mr. J. Hunter. This singular production does 
not proceed directly from the gum itself, hut from a 
thin vascular substance resting upon it. This sub¬ 
stance, which may he called the nidus of the baleen, 
sends out a thin broad process, answering to each 
plate, on which the plate is formed; so that each 
plate is necessarily hollow at its growing end, the 
first part of the growth taking place in the inside of 
this hollow. Besides this, the plate receives addi¬ 
tional layers on the outside, which are formed in the 
same vascular nidus as it extends along the jaw. 
This part forms a semi-horny substance between 
each plate, which is very white, rises with the whale¬ 
bone, and becomes even with the outer edge of the 
jaw. This intermediate substance fills up the spaces 


80 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 


between tbe plates as high as the jaw, and acts as 
abutments to the whalebones, keeping them firm 
in their places. But this will be best explained by 
a reference to the accompanying sketches from 
Mr. Himter. (See Plate i. p , q, r.) 

(p.) —1. Is the part analogous to the gum. 

2. A fleshy substance covering the jaw, on which the inner 
lamina of the plate is formed. 

3. A white substance which surrounds the whalebone, pass 
ing between the plates to form their external laminae. 

4. The part which projects beyond the gum. 

5. The termination of the plate in a kind of hair. 

Sketch q exhibits a perpendicular section of several plates 

of whalebone in their natural situation ; their inner edges 
or shortest terminations are removed, and the cut edges 
of the plates seen from the inside of the mouth. The upper 
part shows the base from which they spring, and the white 
substance in which they grow; the middle part shows the 
distance of the plates from each other; the lower part, the 
rough surface formed by the hairy termination of each plate. 

(r.)—1. Is the basis on which the plates are formed, which 
adheres to the jaw-bone. 

2. 2. The intermediate white substance, laminse of which 
are continued along the middle layer, and form the substance 
of the plate of the whalebone. 

3. The outline of another plate. 

4. One of the outer layers growing from the intermediate 
substance. 

5. The middle layer of the plate, formed on the pulp passing 
up the centre of the plate. The termination of this layer 
forms the hair. 

Mr. Hunter further remarks, “ that in tbe 
growth of the whalebone three parts appear to be 
formed; one from the rising cone, which is the 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 


81 


centre; a second on the outside; and a third being 
the intermediate substance. These appear to have 
three stages of duration; for that which forms on 
the cone, I believe, makes the hair, and that on the 
outside makes principally the plate of whalebone ; 
this, when a certain length, breaks off, leaving the 
hair projecting, becoming at the termination very 
brittle ; and the third or intermediate substance, by 
the time it rises as high as the edge of the jaw, de¬ 
cays and softens away like the old cuticle of the sole 
of the foot.” 

The tongue is incapable of protrusion, being fixed 
from the root to the tip; a slight beard, consisting 
of a few short scattered hairs, surmount the anterior 
extremity of both jaws. The throat is remarkably 
strait; Sir Charles Giesecki states it does not ex¬ 
ceed an inch and a half in width. 

The colour of the mysticetus is velvet-black, grey, 
and white, with a tinge of yellow. The back, most 
of the upper jaw, and part of the lower, together 
with the fins and tail, are black. The lips, the 
fore part of the lower jaw, sometimes a little of the 
upper, and a portion of the abdomen are white; 
and the eyelids, the junction of the tail with the 
body, a portion of the axilla of the fins, &c. are 
grey. The older the animals the more they contain 
of white and grey, and some are all over pie-bald. 

The surface of the body is somewhat furrowed; 
the scarf-skin is not thicker than parchment; the 
rete-mucosum in adults is about three-fourths of an 
inch in thickness, over most parts of the body; in 

VOL. VI. F 


82 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 


suckers nearly two inches: it is generally of the same 
colour throughout its thickness. The oiiaginous 
substance called blubber, and constituting the most 
valuable part of the animal, forms a complete 
wrapper round the whole body from eight to twenty 
inches thick. In some old animals it resembles the 
substance of salmon, whilst in the younger it is 
yellowish white. The lower jaw, excepting the 
two bones, consists almost wholly of blubber, and 
the crown bone is covered with it. The oil appears 
to be retained in the blubber in minute cells ; it is 
expelled when heated, four tons of blubber generally 
affording three tons of oil; and it in a great measure 
discharges itself out of the fenks ,—the square pieces 
into which it is cut, whenever putrefaction in the 
fibrous tissue takes place. The blubber in its fresh 
state is without any unpleasant smell, and hence a 
Greenland ship is not unpleasant in high latitudes. 

The flesh of a young whale is of a red colour, 
and when cleared of fat, broiled, and seasoned with 
pepper and salt, does not eat unlike coarse beef. 
That of the old whale becomes blackish, and is 
exceedingly coarse. The tail is very fibrous and 
sinewy, and is extensively used, particularly in 
Holland, in the manufacture of glue. 

The bone ,9 are very porous, and contain large 
quantities of fine oil; the jaw-bones, which measure 
from twenty to twenty-five feet, are often taken 
care of, principally on account of the oil which 
drains out of them. The external surface of the 
most porous is compact and hard; the ribs are 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 83 

nearly solid; the number, according to the late Sir 
Charles Giesecki, is thirteen pair. 

The sense of hearing in the mysticetus is pro¬ 
bably very different in air and water. A noise in 
the air, such as that produced by a person shouting, 
is not noticed by it, though at a distance only of a 
ship’s length; but a very slight splashing in the 
water, in calm weather, excites its attention and 
alarms it. 

Being somewhat lighter than the medium in 
which it swims, the mysticetus can remain at the 
surface with its spiracles and a considerable portion 
of its hack above water, without any effort or mo¬ 
tion. To descend, however, requires an exertion. 
The proportion which appears above water, when 
alive, is probably not a twentieth part of the animal; 
but, within a day after death, when the process of 
putrefaction commences, it swells to an enormous 
size, till at last a third of the carcase appears above 
water, and sometimes the body is hurst by the force 
of the air generated within. 

Bulky as the whale is, and clumsy as it appears 
to he, it might he imagined that all its motions 
must he sluggish, and its greatest exertions pro¬ 
ductive of no great celerity. The fact, however, is 
the reverse. A whale extended motionless at the 
surface of the sea, can sink, in the space of five or 
six seconds, beyond the reach of its human enemies. 
Its velocity along the surface, and in other direc¬ 
tions, is the same. I have observed, says Scorse'by, 
a whale descending, after I had harpooned it, to the 


84 


THE GREENLAND WHALE. 


depth of about one-fourth of a mile, with the average 
velocity of seven or eight miles an hour. The usual 
rate, however, at which these whales swim, when 
on their passage from one situation to another, 
seldom exceeds four miles an hour. They are 
capable, however, for the space of a few minutes, 
of darting through the water with the velocity of 
the fastest ship under sail; and of ascending with 
such rapidity, as to leap entirely out of the water. 
This feat they sometimes perform apparently as an 
amusement, to the high admiration of the distant 
spectator; but to the no small terror of the inex¬ 
perienced fisher. Sometimes the whales throw 
themselves into a perpendicular position, with their 
heads downwards, and moving their tremendous 
tails on high in the air, heat the water with awful 
violence, which, cracking like a whip, resounds to 
the distance of two or three miles; the sea is thrown 
into foam, and the air filled with vapours. This 
performance is denominated 44 lob-tailing.” 

When the animal retires from the surface, it first 
lifts its head, then plunging it under water, elevates 
its back like a segment of a sphere, deliberately 
rounds it away towards the extremity, throws its 
tail out of the water, and so disappears. 

• The mysticetus usually remains at the surface to 
breath about two minutes, seldom longer; during 
this time it 44 blows” eight or nine times, and 
then descends for an interval usually of five or ten 
minutes; but sometimes, when feeding, fifteen or 
twenty minutes. According to Scorseby, the right 


THE COMMON WHALE. 


85 


whales have no voice , hut in blowing they make a 
loud noise. The vapour they discharge is ejected 
to the height of some yards, and appears at a distance 
like a puff of smoke; they blow strongest, densest, 
and loudest when in a state of alarm, or when they 
first appear on the surface after being a long time 
down. The depth to which they commonly descend 
is not accurately known; hut, when struck, the 
quantity of line they sometimes take out of the 
boats, in perpendicular descent, affords a good 
measure of the depth. By this rule they have been 
known, according to Scorseby, to descend about a 
mile, and with such velocity, that instances have 
occurred in which whales have been drawn up by 
the attached line from a depth greater than the 
highest mountains in Scotland, and have been found 
to have broken their jaws, and sometimes their 
crown-bone, by the blow struck against the bottom. 
Whales are seldom found sleeping; yet instances of 
it have occured among ice in calm weather. 

The food of these animals, so vast and strong, is 
too remarkable not to claim a moment’s attention. 
They have no teeth, and hence we at once perceive 
they cannot prey on the smaller of their own kind, 
or on the larger fishes ; and their throat is so small, 
that they could not dispose of a morsel which is 
swallowed by an ox. The well provided pasture 
grounds, however, as they may be called, exhibit, to 
the contemplation of the curious, one of the most 
wonderful manifestations of Beneficence and Power. 
A very considerable portion of those spaces in which 


86 THE COMMON WHALE. 

this whale is found is occupied by what is called 
green-water. Something analogous, though of a 
yellowish or reddish tint, occurs in southern lati¬ 
tudes, as will he afterwards noticed. Captain 
Scorseby, in 1816, first investigated the peculiarities 
of the green-water. This accomplished naturalist 
states, that it forms perhaps one-fourth part of the 
Greenland sea, between the parallels of 74° and 
80°, equal to about twenty thousand square miles. 
Though it is liable to alteration of position from the 
action of currents, still it is always found, year after 
year, near certain situations. It often constitutes 
long bands or streams, of varying length and breadth, 
extending 2° or 3° of latitude in length, and from 
a few miles to thirty or forty in breadth. It is 
usually an olive-green, and of striking opacity; 
sometimes it is nearly grass-green, or with a shade 
of black. 

Mr. Scorseby examined the qualities of this 
water, and, to his astonishment, fomid that it ob¬ 
tained its colour from the presence of immense 
numbers of animalcules, most of them invisible 
without the aid of the microscope. The greatest 
number consisted of an animal of the medusa kind, 
belonging to an order with wdiich most of our 
readers will be familiar, under the vulgar name of 
sea-blubber, a soft gelatinous substance, often found 
lying on the sea shore, and exhibiting no signs of 
life, except shrinking when touched. He found the 
prevailing specimens to be globular, transparent, 
and from one-twentieth to one-thirtieth of an inch 


PLATE HI . 



J.Stewart Jd? 



































































THE COMMON WHALE. 87 

in diameter. (See Plate hi.) Figure 1 is a spe¬ 
cimen of this, of course greatly magnified; figure 2 
represents another of these minute animals, resem¬ 
bling small portions of fine hair, somewhat dark in 
colour, and verging in length from a point to one- 
tenth of an inch. There appeared to be about 
fairty bead-like articulations in the largest, being 
tlius beautifully monoliform; their diameter ap¬ 
peared to be about one three-hundredth part of an 
irch. Figs. 3, 4, 5, exhibit other minute animals 
which were wholly invisible to the naked eye. 
Tie number of medusa was found to be immense. 
Mr. S. estimates that two square miles contained 
23,888,000,000,000,000; and as this number is 
alove the range of human thought, he illustrates it 
bj observing, that 80,000 persons must have started 
at the creation of the world to complete the enu¬ 
meration at the present time. These animalculae 
an not to be considered as the immediate food of 
tie whale; they form, however, the food of the 
va*ious shrimps and minute crabs, lobsters, and sea- 
siails (figs. 6 , 7 , 8, 9), and medusa, &c. (10, 11, 
IS, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17 , 18 and 19,) upon which the 
mnster of the deep is supported. In this plate is 
sen at one glance the common food of this enor- 
mus whale; and its dependence on these minute 
meets, as well as that of the greater number 
of animals which inhabit those prodigious and 
drary seas, is almost too clear to require demon- 
stntion. As before stated, the invisible animal- 
cuae supply nourishment to the innumerable small 


88 


THE COMMON WHALE. 


shrimps, crabs, &c.; they in their turn are the 
food of the smaller fishes, which again supply 
nourishment to the larger, which are devoured by 
seals, dolphins, and other Cetacea; the hear again 
feeds upon the seal, and thus there is a wonderful 
dependent chain of existence formed, every link of 
which seems essential to the integrity of the whole. 

When this whale feeds, it swims with considerable 
velocity below the surface, with its jaws widely 
extended. A stream of water consequently enters 
its mouth, and along with it large quantities of 
water-insects; the water escapes again at the side ; 
hut the food is entangled and sifted in the balem, 
which, from its compact arrangement, and the thik 
internal covering of hair, does not allow a partitle 
the size of the smallest grain to escape. 

It is presumed the period of gestation is nine or 
ten months, and the whale has but one at a birh, 
instances of two accompanying the female beiig 
very rare. The young one, at the time of birth, is 
ten or fourteen feet long. According to Sir Chares 
Giesecki, it turns on the one side on the surfaceof 
the water when it gives suck to its young, and tbn 
the cub attaches itself to the teat. It goes umer 
the protection of its mother, probably for somewlat 
more than a year, till by the growth of the balen 
it is enabled to procure its own food. It appars 
to attain its full growth at the age of twenty or 
twenty-five. The marks of age are an increase of 
the quantity of grey colour on the skin, an< a 
change to a yellowish tint of the white parts; a 




THE COMMON WHALE. 


w 

decrease in the quantity of oil, and an increase in 
the hardness of the blubber. It is supposed to 
attain a great age. 

The natural affection of this species is interesting. 
The cub being insensible to danger is easily har¬ 
pooned, when the attachment of the mother is so 
manifested, as to bring it almost certainly within 
the reach of the whalers. Hence, though the cub 
is of little value, yet it is often struck as a snare 
for the mother. In this case she joins it at the 
surface whenever it has occasion to rise for resni- 

JL 

ration, encourages it to swim off, and seldom de¬ 
serts it while life remains. She is then dangerous 
to approach, hut affords frequent opportunities of 
attack. She loses all regard for her own safety in 
anxiety for the preservation of her young, dashes 
through the midst of her enemies, despises the 
danger that threatens her, and even voluntarily 
remains with her offspring after various attacks on 
herself. In 1811, says Mr. Scorseby, one of my 
harpooners struck a sucker, with the hope of lead¬ 
ing to the capture of the mother. Presently she 
arose close by the “ fast boat,” and seizing the young 
one, dragged about six-hundred feet of line out of 
the boat with remarkable force and velocity. Again 
she rose to the surface, darted furiously to and 
fro, frequently stopt short or suddenly changed 
her direction, and gave every possible intimation of 
extreme agony. For a length of time she continued 
thus to act, though closely pursued by the boats ; 
and inspired with courage and resolution by her 


90 


THE COMMON WHALE. 


concern for her young, seemed regardless of the 
danger which surrounded her. At length one of 
the boats approached so near that a harpoon was 
hove at her; it hit, but did not attach itself. A 
second harpoon was struck, but this also failed to 
penetrate ; but a third was more effectual and held. 
Still she did not attempt to escape, but allowed 
other boats to approach; so that in a few minutes 
three more harpoons were fastened, and in the 
course of an hour afterwards she was killed. There 
is something, continues this interesting writer, ex¬ 
tremely painful in the destruction of a whale, when 
thus evincing a degree of affectionate regard for its 
offspring, which would do honour to the superior 
intelligence of human beings; yet the object of the 
adventure, the value of the prize, the joy of the 
capture, cannot be sacrificed to feelings of com¬ 
passion. 

The mysticetus, though often found in great 
numbers together, can scarcely he said to he grega¬ 
rious ; for they are found most generally solitary, 
or in pairs, excepting when they are drawn to the 
same spot by the attraction of an abundance of 
palatable food, or of a choice situation among the 
icebergs. 

The habitat of this valuable species (as we shall 
presently see of others) is a point of the highest 
economic importance, and more especially now, when 
it has been chased from its older haunts into nearly 
the impenetrable and certainly the most hazardous 
recesses of the Polar Seas. In the Athenaeum of 


THE COMMON WHALE. 


91 


the current year, January 1836, it is stated, “ that 
the whole of the whales which frequent the Polar 
Seas pass annually to the southward, and may be 
equally well encountered in the Atlantic Ocean, in 
well known positions and seasons; that they pass 
in bodies in the months of March and April, about 
midway between the coasts of Iceland and New¬ 
foundland ; and that a much nearer and less dan¬ 
gerous fishery might be established at that season 
than by the present voyage to the Arctic Seas.” 
The great importance of the point at issue has in¬ 
duced us to <nve this statement from our much re- 

o 

spected cotemporary; though we fear it is inaccu¬ 
rate, and might be adduced as an illustration of the 
prevailing ignorance concerning the whale tribes. 
If “ the whole of the whales” go southward in 
March and April, how does it happen that, for 
hundreds of years, so many have been captured in 
the Polar Seas during the summer and autumnal 
months ? Another scarcely less serious objection 
is the decided statement of Mr. Scorseby, the very 
highest authority on this subject, and which we be¬ 
lieve has never been contradicted, that the true 
mysticetus has never been seen beyond the limits of 
the Arctic Regions. Besides, the green-water or 
feeding grounds of the whale, as well as the mollusca 
and other small animals on which they feed, are rare, 
or not at all seen, in lower latitudes. Mariners, it is 
true, often make such statements as the above; they 
have in this way reported, that great shoals of the 
largest w r hales frequent the northern shores of Lap- 


92 


THE COMMON WHALE. 


land ; and this is so far true ; but, on examination, 
it is found not to be the mysticetus, but the rorqual, 
which comes next under our review, and we are dis¬ 
posed to think, that “ the bodies of whales” will be 
found to belong to this species, which, we shall pre¬ 
sently see, is usually avoided as unworthy of capture. 

A description of the more valuable products of the 
whale will follow in the succeeding sketch of the 
fishery; hut we shall now say a few words of those 
portions of it which are used in the domestic eco¬ 
nomy of uncivilized nations. 

Although, to the palate of the refined European, 
the flesh of this whale would he viewed with ab¬ 
horrence as an article of food; yet by some of the 
inhabitants of the borders of the frozen seas, it is 
regarded as a choice article of subsistence. The 
Esquimaux eat the flesh and fat, and drink the oil 
with great greediness. Indeed, some tribes which 
are not familiar with spirituous liquor, carry along 
with them in their canoes, bladders filled with oil, 
which they use in the same way and with a similar 
relish as a toper does his dram. They also eat the 
skin of the whale raw, both adults and children ; 
even the infants suck it with apparent delight. 
Blubber, when pickled and boiled, is said to be very 
palatable ; the tail, when parboiled and then fried, 
is said to be not unsavoury, but even agreeable eat¬ 
ing ; and the flesh of young whales is by no means 
indifferent food. 

Besides forming a choice eatable, the inferior pro¬ 
ducts of the whale are applied to other purposes by 


THE COMMON WHALE. 


93 


the inhabitants of the Arctic Regions. Some mem¬ 
branes of the abdomen are used for the upper articles 
of clothing, and the peritoneum, in particular, being 
thin and transparent, is used instead of glass in the 
windows of their huts ; the bones are converted into 
harpoons and spears, for striking the seal or darting 
at sea-birds, and are also employed in the erec¬ 
tion of their tents, and, with some tribes, in the for¬ 
mation of their boats; the sinews are divided into 
filaments, and used as thread with which they sew, 
with great nicety, the different articles of their dress. 


NORTHERN WHALE FISHERY. 

We should feel the more regret, that our limited 
space will not permit us to present a detailed ac¬ 
count of the commerce and adventures of the north¬ 
ern fishery, or that of mysticetus, if we could not 
refer our readers, with the utmost confidence on 
these heads, to the very elaborate work of Mr. 
Scorsehy, and also to a short but masterly account, 
brought down to the present day, in the last edition 
of the first volume of the much esteemed work of 
our contemporary, the Edinburgh Cabinet Library. 
Both of these, and especially the former, are mines 
of the most interesting and important information; 
and we lament we cannot more freely bring their 
contents under the notice of our readers. We find 



NORTHERN WHALE FISHERY. 


we must entirely omit even the short abridgement 
we had prepared, concerning the early and past 
history of the trade, as prosecuted by the Basques, 
the British, Dutch, and other nations, first on the 
coast of France and northern Europe; then with 
amazing energy and success at Spitzbergen; then in 
the Greenland seas; and finally, in Davies’ Straits 
and the northern shores of America. All we can 
now attempt is a few very brief statements regard¬ 
ing the present condition of the trade. 

The following summary is given by Mr. Scorseby 
as the average quantity of shipping fitted out in 
different ports for nine years, ending 1818; and the 
comparison of it with the number sent out in 1830, 
taken from the Edinburgh Cabinet Library, will 
show the state of the trade at that date. The table 
likewise shows the share of the trade which is taken 
by England and Scotland; that it has very much 
been diminishing in the former country and some¬ 
what increasing in the latter. 



England, Berwick 
Grimsby 


Liveq>ool 
London . 
Lynn 


Hull 


Whitby . 


Newcastle 


1 7-9ths 
1 4-9ths 
53 4-9ths 
1 8-9ths 
17 8-9ths 
1 4-9ths 
4 7-9ths 
8 8-9ths 


1 

0 

33 

0 

2 

0 

3 


2 


91 5-9ths 


41 







NORTHERN WHALE FISHERY. 


95 


Average of 

1810-13. 


In 1830. 


Scotland, Aberdeen 
Banff 

Burntisland 
Dundee . 
Greenock 
Kirkaldy 
Kirkwall . 
Leith 
Montrose 
Peterhead 


10 8-9ths 10 

8-9ths 0 

0 1 

7 5-9ths 9 

8-9ths 1 

7-9ths 5 

6-9ths 0 

8 7-9ths 7 

2 7-9ths 4 

6 8-9ths 13 


40 l-9th 50 
England 91 5-9ths 41 


Total 131 6-9ths 91 


The decrease so marked in the above table, in 
comparing the year 1830 with the former average, 
has been steadily going on up to the present time. 
In 1831 there were eighty-eight ships engaged ; in 
1832, eighty-one; in 1833, seventy-seven; and in 
1834, seventy-six. 

For many years the fishery in Davis Straits was 
considered less hazardous than that of Greenland, 
in as much as the sea was clearer of ice, and the 
climate, on account of the lower latitude, somewhat 
more mild. The alterations, however, which have 
occurred in this fishery are precisely similar to those 
which occurred at Spitzbergen. The fish have gra¬ 
dually retired more and more to the northward, and 
deserted those localities in which they used to be 
captured in abundance. Twenty years ago, they 
were caught in great numbers in the opening of 
Hudson’s Straits, and at the borders of the western 








96 


NORTHERN WHALE FISHERY. 


ice, near the coast of Labrador. In 1817, some of 
the Davis Straits whalers proceeded through the 
straits into Baffin’s Bay, to a much greater length 
than they were in the habit of adventuring, where, 
in the months of July and August, they found the 
sea clear of ice, and, in some parts, abounding 
with whales. In this state of the trade, the vessels 
destined for this quarter usually sailed in March or 
April. They proceeded first to the northern parts 
of Labrador, or to the mouth of Cumberland Straits, 
carrying on what was called the south-west fishery. 
After remaining there till about the beginning of 
May, they crossed to the east shore of the straits, 
and fished northwards along the coast. About the 
month of July they usually crossed Baffin’s Bay to 
Lancaster Sound, which they sometimes entered, 
and occasionally even ascended Barrow’s Straits. 
In returning, they fished down the western coast. 
If the ships were not previously filled, they re¬ 
mained there till the end of September, and, in some 
instances, persevered till late in October. 

.« But this south-west fishery, and that on the 
eastern shore, to a high latitude, have shared the 
fate of the others we have alluded to; and, in the 
language of the whalers, have been “ fished out.” 
Captains Ross and Parry, on returning from their 
celebrated voyages, reported that, on the north¬ 
western shores of Baffin’s Bay, whales had been seen 
in vast numbers, and this information immediately 
kindled the spirit of enterpise, and, for a time, signal 
success was the result. Since that period, the ori- 


NORTHERN WHALE FISHERY. 97 

ginal grounds in Labrador and Davis Straits have 
been regarded only as secondary objects; and every 
nerve has been strained to reach those interior shores 
in high latitudes, where whales are still found in 
abundance. If, however, the prize is here found, 
so also is a corresponding risk; and dangers far- 
exceeding those previously met with, have been 
encountered, and disasters which had never been 
previously equalled, even in this hazardous trade. 

The British capital embarked in this branch of 
commerce is calculated to be at the present time 
upwards of £.1,000,000 Sterling. The average 
return for the five years, ending with 1818, was 
£.567,000 per annum; that of 1814, a year pecu¬ 
liarly favourable, was above £.700,000; that of 
1829 was upwards of £.376,000; and that of 1830, 
including the South Sea Fishing, was £.428,591. 
When a ship returns clean, the loss is estimated 
about £.2000; and the total expenses of a voyage, 
which yields two hundred tons of oil, is about 
£.3500. 

The average price of oil for the last twenty years 
has been about £.30 per ton; and of whalebone 
£.163. The greatest cargo ever known by Mr. 
Scorseby, to have been brought from the northern 
seas, was that by Captain Souter of the Resolution 
of Peterhead, in 1814. It consisted of forty-four 
whales, yielding two hundred and ninety-nine tons 
of oil, which sold at £.9568; and adding the 
bounty and whalebone, the entire returns amounted 
£.11,000. In 1817, both Mr. Scorseby and his 

VOL. VI. ' G 


98 


NORTHERN WHALE FISHERY. 


father, who spent a long and honourable life in the 
trade, secured cargoes which, though less in quan¬ 
tity, yet, from the price being higher, yielded a 
larger return. This latter gentleman, in the course 
of twenty-eight voyages, killed four hundred and 
ninety-eight whales, whence were extracted four 
thousand two hundred and forty-six tons of oil, the 
value of which, with the bone, exceeded £.150,000! 

So keenly has the fishery been prosecuted, and 
so great has been the number of whales taken, that 
it has been feared that, unless some restriction be 
imposed, the race will be extinguished, and the trade 
destroyed. Mr. Scorseby states, that, during the four 
years ending with the summer 1817, the number of 
whales killed by the British Greenland ships was 
three thousand five hundred and eight; and by those 
of the Davis Straits fishery, one thousand five 
hundred and twenty-two, in all five thousand and 
thirty. Upon the whole, it seems evident, that all 
those localities which were once crowded with the 
mysticetus, after the whalers have visited them for 
some time, become nearly deserted, and thus our 
fishers are time after time compelled to seek for 
new grounds for their exertions. And if the trade 
continue to be prosecuted with the same eagerness, 
there seems reason to fear that the mighty giant of 
the deep 'will finally share the fate of the most 
gigantic species of land animals, which would ap¬ 
pear to have become extinct •within the records of 
history, and that chiefly through the encreasing 
slaughter and pursuit of man. 


99 


PROCEEDINGS IN CAPTURING THE wrfALE. 

But it is now time to give a short sketch of the 
method practised in capturing the whale. The first 
object is to fit out a ship adapted for the trade ; 
and constructed, therefore, in such a manner as 
to possess a peculiar degree of strength. Its ex¬ 
posed parts, accordingly, are secured with double 
or treble timbers; whilst it is fortified internally 
with ice beams and cross bars, and externally with 
iron plates, &c. so disposed as to make the pressure 
on any one part to be supported by the whole fabric. 
A ship of about three hundred and fifty tons is 
deemed the most eligible, with a crew of about 
fifty men; six or seven very light and swift boats 
are required for the immediate pursuit ; and one of 
the essential requisites is the crows nest , or hur¬ 
ricane-house, invented by the elder Scorseby, a 
species of watch-tower, made of hoops and canvass, 
placed on the main-top mast for the use of the 
master or officer on watch, to shelter him from the 
blast, wffiere he may be called to sit for hours at 
the temperature of zero, and whence he can discover 
all the movements of the surrounding ice or fish, 
and give directions accordingly. 

The whaling vessels, in going north, usually touch 
at the Shetland Islands, to complete their water, pro¬ 
visions, &c. and leaving the land generally about the 
beginning of April, they arrive within the Polar 
Seas before the end of that month. As soon as they 


\ 


100 


PROCEEDINGS IN 


reach the haunts of the whale, the crew must be 
every moment on the alert, keeping watch day and 
night. The boats, hanging over the ship’s side, are 
ready to be launched in an instant ; and when the 
state of the sea admits, one of them is usually 
manned and afloat. The officer in the crow’s nest 
surveys the waters to a great distance, and the 
instant he perceives a whale he gives notice to the 
watch on deck, some of whom start instantly with 
the first boat, which is immediately followed by a 
second. Each of the boats has a harpooner and 
other subordinate officers; and is provided with an 
immense quantity of rope, carefully coiled and 
stowed in different parts of the boat, the different 
parts being spliced together, so as to form a con¬ 
tinued line usually exceeding 4000 feet in length. 
To the end is attached the harpoon. The boat is 



now rowed towards the whale with the greatest 
possible speed, in the deepest silence, cautiously 
avoiding giving alarm : sometimes a circuitous route 
is adopted in order to approach it from behind. 
Having reached within a few yards, the harpooner 
darts his instrument into the giant, who in the 
surprise and agony of the moment makes a convul¬ 
sive effort to escape. This is the moment of danger, 
for the boat is exposed to the most violent blows of 
the whale’s head or fins, and still more of its tail, 
which sometimes sweeps the air with such tre- 










CAPTURING THE WHALE. 101 

mendous fury, that both boat and men are exposed 
to a common destruction. 

The moment that the wounded whale disappears, 
a jack or flag is displayed in the boat; on the sight 
of which, those on watch in the ship give the 
alarm by stamping on the deck, accompanied by 
the continued shout of “ a fall, a fall.” At this 
signal the sleeping crew axe aroused, jump from 
their beds, rush upon deck, with their clothes tied 
in a string in their hands, and crowd into the boats. 
With a temperature at zero, should a fall occur, the 
crew would appear on deck, covered only with their 
under garments, in the anticipation of dressing 
themselves, in part at least, as the boats are lowered 
down, though sometimes they are disappointed, and 
cannot get the process accomplished for a length of 
time afterwards. 

The first and usual effort of the fast-Jish is to 
escape from the boat by sinking under water, 
plunging with rapid flight under some neighbouring 
mountain of ice, or into the deep abyss. When 
fleeing from his pursuers, and then darting at the rate 
of eight or ten miles an hour, the greatest care must 
be used, that the line to which the harpoon is at¬ 
tached may run off readily along with him. Should 
it be entangled for a moment, the whale would draw 
the boat beneath the waves. Sometimes, however, 
to retard its motion, it is usual for the harpooner 
to cast one or more turns of the line round a kind 
of post, called the bollard , which is fixed near the 
Stem of the boat for the purpose; and such is the 


102 


PROCEEDINGS IN 


friction of the line, when running round the bollard, 
that it frequently envelopes the harpooner in smoke ; 
and if the wood were not repeatedly wetted, it 
would set fire to the boat. Notwithstanding this 
manoeuvre, the line is often run out in eight or ten 
minutes; its end is then attached to the lines of the 
next boat, and even those of a third are sometimes 
put into requisition. When the crew of a boat see 
there is a prospect of their own store being ex¬ 
hausted, they hold up one, two, three, or more oars, 
according to the urgency of the required aid; for if 
none arrives, there is only one resource left, which 
is to cut the line, and thus lose it, fish and all. 

The period during which a wounded whale re¬ 
mains under water is various, but, at an average, 
may be stated at half an hour. It is sometimes an 
hour, and more rarely longer still; and it has been 
asserted, on good authority, that a case has occurred 
of a wounded whale being dragged up alive after 
having been an hour and a half continually under 
water; a singular fact, certainly, in the history of 
warm-blooded animals. When it remains long under 
water, it becomes asphyxiated or nearly drowned, 
and in all instances is greatly exhausted for want 
of fresh air, and by means of the enormous pres¬ 
sure, equal according to Mr. Scorsehy to upwards 
of 200,000 tons, which exceeds the weight of sixty of 
the largest ships of the British Navy, when manned, 
provisioned, and fitted for a six months cruise. 

When the fast fish is under water, the assisting 
boats take up those positions near to which they cal- 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


103 


culate he is most likely to rise, in order that one 
of them at least may be within a start , as it is 
called; that is, within two hundred yards of his 
place of re-appearing, at which distance they can 
easily reach him before he is prepared to descend 
again. On its rising, they hasten towards the spot, 
and as they reach it, each harpooner plunges his 
weapon into its back, to the amount of three, four, 
or more, according to the size of the whale, and 
the nature of the situation. Most frequently, how¬ 
ever, the animal descends a few minutes after re¬ 
ceiving the second harpoon, and obliges the other 
boats to await its return to the surface, before any 
further attack can be made. After this it is actively 
plied with long and sharp lances, which are thrust 
into its body, and aimed deep at its vitals. At 
length, when exhausted with numerous wounds and 
the loss of blood, which flows in copious streams, it 
indicates the approach of dissolution by discharging 
blood from the spiracles, along with the air and 
mucus, and finally, jets of blood alone appear. The 
sea to a great extent is dyed with the blood,—and the 
ice, boats, and men, are sometimes drenched with it. 
Its track is likewise marked by a broad pellicle of 
oil, which exudes from its w'ounds, and appears on 
the surface of the sea. The final capture is some¬ 
times preced'ed by a convulsive and awful struggle : 
and in dying, it turns over on its side or back; 
which joyful circumstance is announced by three 
loud huzzas, and the striking of the flags. No time 
is lost, ere the tail is pierced and fastened with ropes 


104 


PROCEEDINGS IN 


to the boats, which drag the carcase to the ship 
amidst shouts of triumph. 

What is the time requisite for capturing a whale ? 
In answer to this question, Mr. Scorseby states, that 
he has seen a whale despatched in fifteen minutes, 
and others alive, after severe treatment, at the end 
of fifty hours. Much depends on the conduct of 
the animal itself,—much on the activity of the 
whaler,—and much, also, on the nature of the situ¬ 
ation and weather. He states, that the average 
time does not exceed an hour. 

As bearing on this point, and exhibiting the sur¬ 
prising vigour of the mysticetus, we shall here in¬ 
troduce an anecdote related by Mr Scorseby. In 
1817 the Royal Bounty of Leith fell in with whales 
at a distance from land and ice, there being at the 
same time a brisk breeze and clear weather. The 
boats were manned and sent in pursuit. After a chase 
of five hours, one of the boats struck the whale about 
four a. m. The captain followed in the ship, and 
though for a time he lost sight of them, yet he again 
descried a boat at eight A. M., with a signal displayed 
of being fast. Some time after, he observed another 
boat approach the fish, a second harpoon struck, 
and a new signal displayed. As, however, the fish 
drew the two boats away with considerable speed, 
it was mid-day before any assistance could reach 
them. Two more harpoons were then struck; but 
such was the vigour of the whale, that, though 
it constantly dragged through the water from four to 
six boats, together with a length of nearly a thousand 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


105 


feet of line to each, yet it pursued its course nearly 
as fast as a boat could row; and such was the terror 
it manifested on the approach of its enemies, that 
whenever a boat passed beyond its tail, it invariably 
dived. All endeavours, therefore, to lance it were 
in vain. The crews of the loose boats, being unable 
to keep pace with the fish, moored themselves to 
the fast boats, and for some hours afterwards all 
hands were constrained to sit idle, waiting for some 
relaxation in the speed of the whale. Its general 
course had been to windward, but its changing 
enabled the ship, which had previously been at a 
great distance, to join the boats at eight, p. m. 
The vessel took one of the fast lines on board, 
with the view of retarding its progress. The sails 
were lowered and furled, but after supporting the 
ship for a few minutes, head to 'wind, the harpoon 
lost its hold. - The whale immediately set off to 
windward with increased speed, and, for three hours, 
the ship could not again approach it. Another line 
was then taken on board, but immediately broke. 
A fifth harpoon had previously been struck, but its 
line was speedily cut. Various schemes for arresting 
the speed of the fish were then resorted to, which 
occupied close attention for nearly twelve hours ; 
but its velocity was still such, that the master, who 
had himself proceeded to the attack, was unable 
to approach sufficiently near to strike a harpoon. 
After a long chase, however, he succeeded in get¬ 
ting hold of one of the fast lines, and attached 
another line to it. The fish then fortunately turned 


106 


PROCEEDINGS IN 


towards the ship. At four p. m., thirty-six hours 
after it was struck, the ship again joined the boats, 
when, by a successful manoeuvre, they secured two 
of the fast lines on board. The wind was blowing 
a moderately brisk breeze, and the sails were 
lowered; but notwithstanding the resistance a ship 
thus situated must necessarily have offered, she was 
towed by the fish directly to windward, with a 
velocity of two knots, during an hour and a half; 
and then, though the whale must have been greatly 
exhausted, it beat the w T aters with its fins and tail 
in so tremendous a way, that the sea around was 
in a continual foam, and the most hardy of the 
sailors scarcely dared to approach it. At length, 
about eight p. m., after forty hours of almost inces¬ 
sant exertion, this formidable enemy w r as slain. 

After a whale has been caught and secured at the 
sides of the ship, the next operation is that of flensing 
or securing the blubber and whalebone. This dis— 
agreeble process can, with the whole strength of the 
crew, he effected in about four hours. Each seaman 
receives a dram, and some of the more important 
personages receive two. The huge carcass is some¬ 
what extended by strong tackles placed at the snout 
and tail: a hand of blubber two or three feet in 
width, encircling the fish’s body at what is the neck 
in other animals, is called the kent , because by 
means of it the fish is turned over or kented. To 
this band is fixed the lower extremity of a combi¬ 
nation of powerful blocks, called the kent-purchase , 
by means of which, the whole circumference of the 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


107 

animal is, section by section, brought to the surface. 
The harpooners then, having spikes on their feet to 
prevent their falling from the carcass, begin with 
a kind of spade, and with huge knives, to make 



long parallel cuts from end to end, which are divided 
by cross-cuts into pieces of about half a ton. These 
are conveyed on deck, and, being reduced into 
smaller portions, are stowed in the hold. Finally, 
being by other operations still further divided, it is 
put into casks, which is called making-off, and 
packed down completely by a suitable instrument. 

When this flensing is proceeding, and when it 
reaches the lips, which contain much oil, the baleen 
is exposed. This is detached by means of bone hand¬ 
spikes, bone knives, and bone spades. The whole 
whalebone is hoisted on deck in one mass, where 
it is split by bone-wedges into junks, containing 
five or ten blades each, and stowed away. When 
the whole whalebone and blubber are thus pro¬ 
cured, the two jaw-bones, from the quantity of oil 
which they contain, are usually hoisted on deck, 
and then only the kreng remains,—the huge car¬ 
cass of flesh and bone, which is abandoned either 
to sink, or to be devoured by the birds and sharks, 
and bears, which duly attend on such occasions for 
their share of the prey. 

It will be readily believed that none of the pro- 
































108 


PROCEEDINGS IN 


ceedings which we have now been considering are 
free from numerous perils. In a high sea the flen¬ 
sing itself is often difficult or impossible; and 
those upon the body of the fish are exposed to con¬ 
siderable risk. Sometimes they fall into the "whale’s 
mouth, at the imminent hazard of being drowned. 
In the case of a heavy swell, they are drenched, and 
often washed over by the surge. Occasionally they 
have their ropes broken, and are wounded by each 
others’ knives. Mr. Scorseby mentions an instance 
of a man, who, after the flensing was completed, 
happened to have his foot attached by a hook to the 
carcass, when it was inadvertently let go. He 
caught hold of the gunwale of the boat; but the 
whole immense mass was now suspended by his 
body, occasioning the most excruciating torture, and 
even exposing him to the risk of being tom asunder; 
when his companions contrived afresh to hook the 
carcass with a grapnel, and brought it back to the 
surface. 

In the account which we have presented of the 
capture, all circumstances are supposed to be fa¬ 
vourable ; but often it is the very reverse. A storm 
may arise, and a fog often envelopes the whole 
operations; immense islands or floes, i. e. masses of 
field-ice, may be impelled upon them by the tem¬ 
pest, and with such velocity as to overwhelm them 
in a moment, or a frost may make them fast in its 
hard and icy grasp. It is such incidents as these 
which make this employment one of the most trying 
and hazardous that can be pursued: while they 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


109 


occasionally lead to the most extraordinary ad¬ 
ventures ; as examples of which, we subjoin a very 
few narratives of facts. 

The whale itself, though for the most part unde- 
signedly, is the cause of the greatest number of 
accidents which occur. Injuries are often sustained 
by entanglement with the lines. A sailor belonging 
to the John of Greenock, in 1818, happening to 
slip into a coil of running rope, had his foot entirely 
cut off, and was obliged to have the lower part of 
the leg amputated. A haxpooner belonging to the 
Hamilton, when engaged in lancing a whale, in¬ 
cautiously cast a little line under his foot: The pain 
of the lance induced the whale to dart suddenly 
downwards; his line began to run out from under 
his feet, and, in an instant, caught him by a turn 
round the body: He had just time to call out, 
“ Clear away the line—Oh dear!” when he was 
almost cut asunder, dragged overboard, and never 
seen afterwards. The following graphic and tra¬ 
gical scene is taken from Mr. Scorseby’s Journal. 
Two boats belonging to the Baffin of Liverpool 
having been many hours absent from the ship, and 
occasioned much anxiety, were at last descried 
pulling towards the ship. On their approach, we 
were a little surprised by some unusual appear¬ 
ances, particularly their want of their proper com¬ 
plement of oars, and the solemn countenances of 
the rowers. As soon as they came within hail, I 
inquired what had happened. “ A bad misfor¬ 
tune, indeed,” was the answer, w we have lost 


110 


DANGERS IN 


Carr!”—the principal officer of the boat. The par¬ 
ticulars were as follow : The two boats which had 
been so long absent had in the outset separated 
from their companions, and allured by the chase of 
a whale, they proceeded till they were far out of 
sight of the ship. The whale led them amidst a 
great shoal ; one rose so near the boat of which 
Carr was harpooner, that he ventured to pull 
towards it, though it was meeting him, and offered 
but an indifferent prospect of success: he, how¬ 
ever, succeeded in liarpooning it. The boat and 
fish passing each other with great rapidity after the 
stroke, the line was jerked out of its place, and, in¬ 
stead of “ running” over the stem, was thrown over 
the gunwale; its pressure in this unfavourable posi¬ 
tion so careened the boat, that the side sank under 
water and began to fill. In this emergency the har¬ 
pooner, who w r as a very fine active fellow, seized the 
line, and attempted to relieve the boat, by restoring 
it to its place; but a turn of the line flew over his arm, 
in an instant dragged him overboard, and plunged 
him under water to rise no more ! So sudden was 
the accident, that only one man, who had his eye 
upon him at the moment, was aware of what had 
happened ; so that when the boat righted, which it 
immediately did, though half full of water, they all 
at once, on looking round at an exclamation from 
the man who had seen him launched overboard, 
inquired “ What had got Carr V It is scarcely 
possible to imagine a death more awfully sudden 
or unexpected. The accident was, indeed, so in- . 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


Ill 


stantaneous, that he had no time for the least 
exclamation; and the person who witnessed his 
extraordinary removal observed, that it was so 
exceedingly quick, that although his eye was upon 
him at the instant, he could scarcely distinguish the 
object as it disappeared. 

A large whale became the subject of a general 
chase, says Scorseby, on the 23d of June. Being 
myself in the first boat which approached the fish, 
I struck my harpoon at arm’s-length, by which we 
fortunately evaded a blow which appeared to be 
aimed at the boat. Another boat then advanced, 
and another harpoon was struck, but not with the 
same result; for the stroke was immediately re¬ 
turned by a tremendous blow from the fish’s tail. 
The boat was sunk by the shock, and at the same 
time whirled round with such velocity, that the 
boat-steerer was precipitated into the water on the 
side next to the fish, and carried down to a con¬ 
siderable depth by its tail. After a minute or so, 
he arose to the surface, and was taken up along 
with his companions into another boat. 

Some boats of the Aimwell, on the 26th May, 
being in pursuit of whales, harpooned one. When 
struck, this individual only dived for a moment, 
and then rose again beneath the boat, struck it in 
the most vicious manner with its tail and fins, stove, 
upset it, and then disappeared. The crew, seven in 
number, got on the bottom of the boat; but the un¬ 
equal action of the lines, which remained entangled 
with the boat, rolled it over occasionally, and thus 


112 


DANGERS IN 


plunged the crew repeatedly into the water. Four 
of them, after each immersion, recovered themselves 
and clung to the boat; hut the other three were 
drowned before assistance could arrive. The four 
men being rescued, the attack on the whale was 
continued, and two more harpoons were struck. 
But the whale, irritated instead of being enervated 
by its wounds, recommenced its furious attack. 
The sea was in foams; its tail and fins were in 
awful play; and, in a short time, harpoon after 
harpoon drew out, and the fish escaped. 

We produce the following account, not because 
we believe it refers to the Greenland Whale (we 
think it did not), but because the adventure elicited 
the statement, that the same feat is often exhibited 
by it; as is true, we believe, of all the larger genera. 
Dr. Foster, indeed, in Cook’s Voyages, very clearly 
tells us he saw it in the southern rorqual, as will 
be found in our account of that animal. The fol¬ 
lowing anecdote is extracted from the interesting 
fragments of Captain B. Hall, and occurred when 
that gentleman was midshipman on board his ma¬ 
jesty’s ship Leander, which was lying at the time in 
the roads of Bermuda, the locality already signalized 
on page 73. As on the former occasion, a great 
whale, between fifty and sixty feet in length, which 
was embayed within the coral rocks, and swimming 
about the vessel, soon attracted the attention of the 
crew. All hands crowded into the rigging to see it 
floundering about, till at length some one proposed 
to pay him a visit in one of the ship’s boats, “ and 


GREENLAND WHALE 



PLATE IV. 


























CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


133 


away we (viz. some of the midshipmen) went,” says 
the Captain, “ in ourwild-goose whale-chase. All eyes 
were now upon us, and, after a pause, it was agreed 
unanimously that we should run right on hoard of 
him and take our chance. So we rowed forward, 
but the whale slipped down, clean out of sight, leaving 
only a monstrous pool, in the vortex of which we 
continued whirling about for some time. As we were 
lying on our oars, and somewhat puzzled what to do 
next, we beheld one of the most extraordinary sights 
in the world ; at least, I do not remember to have 
seen many things which have surprised me so much, 
or made a deeper impression on my memory. Our 
friend the whale, probably finding the water dis¬ 
agreeably shallow, or perhaps provoked at not being 
able to disentangle himself from the sharp coral 
reefs, or from some other reason of pleasure or pain, 
suddenly made a leap out of the Water. So com¬ 
plete was this enormous leap, that for an instant 
we saw him fairly up in the air, in a horizontal 
position, at a distance of at least twenty perpendi¬ 
cular feet over our heads! While in his progress 
upwards, there was in his spring some touch of the 
vivacity with which a trout or a salmon shoots out 
of the water ; but he fell back again on the sea, like 
a huge log thrown on its broadside, and with such 
a thundering crash, as made all hands stare in 
astonishment, and the boldest held his breath for a 
time. Total demolition, indeed, must have been 
the inevitable fate of our party, had the whale 
taken his leap one minute sooner, for he would 
yol. vi. n 


114 


DAGGERS IN 


then have fallen plump on the boat. The waves 
caused by the explosion spread over half the an¬ 
chorage ; nor, if the Leander herself had blown up, 
could the effects have extended much farther.” 

After preparing the foregoing narrative for the 
press, Captain Hall, in order to fortify himself by 
the highest authority in these matters, wrote to Mr. 
Scorseby, detailing the fact, and inquiring if he had 
ever witnessed any tiling of the sort. This elicited 
the following reply, “ I have much pleasure in being 
able to speak to the point in attestation of the not 
infrequency of the exhibition of the high leaps 
which you witnessed, however ignorance might 
charge it as 4 very like a whale/ Whilst engaged 
in the northern whale fishery, I witnessed many 
similar exploits of whales of forty or fifty feet in 
length, forgetting their usual gravity, and making 
these odd exhibitions of their whole form from head 
to tail. Certainly, I have several times seen whales 
leap so high out of water, as to be completely in 
air, which, reckoning from the surface of the back, 
could scarcely be less than twenty feet, and possibly 
might be more. I have at different times pursued 
these ffolicksome fish, but they have always es¬ 
caped.” 

“ In one of my earliest voyages,” remarks Mr. 
Scorseby, on another occasion, “ I observed a circum¬ 
stance which excited my highest astonishment. One 
of the harpooners struck a whale, it dived, and all 
the assisting boats had collected round the fast boat 
before it arose to the surface. The first boat that 


GREENLAND WHALE. 











































CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


115 


approached it advanced incautiously. It rose with 
unexpected violence beneath the boat, and projected 
it and all the crew to the height of some yards into 
the air. It fell on its side, and cast all the men 
into the water; one was somewhat injured, but the 
rest escaped.” 

Captain Lyons of the Raith of Leith, in 1802, 
despatched four boats after a large whale on the 
coast of Labrador, and two of them succeeded in 
approaching so closely together, that two harpoons 
were struck at the same moment. The fish de¬ 
scended a few fathoms in the direction of another 
of the boats, which was on the advance,—rose be¬ 
neath it, struck it with its head, and threw the boat, 
men, and apparatus about fifteen feet into the air. 
It was inverted by the stroke, and fell into the 
water with its keel upwards. All the people were 
picked up alive by the fourth boat, except one man, 
who, having got entangled in the boat, fell beneath 
it and was drowned. 

The following anecdote illustrates the dangers 
arising from the ice. On the commencement of a 
heavy gale of wind, May 11, 1813, fourteen men 
put off in a boat from the Volunteer of Whitby, 
with the view of fixing an anchor on a large piece 
of ice, to which it was intended to moor the ship. 
The ship approached on a signal being made, and 
a rope was fixed to the anchor; but the ice shiver¬ 
ing with the violence of the strain when the ship 
fell astern, the anchor flew out, and the ship went 
adrift. She attempted again to approach the ice, 


116 


DAGGERS IN 


but in vain, owing to the violence of the gale, and 
scudded to leeward; thus leaving fourteen of her 
crew to a fate the most dreadful, the fulfilment of 
which appeared almost inevitable. The temperature 
was at 15° Fahrenheit, when these poor fellows 
were left upon a detached piece of ice of no con¬ 
siderable magnitude, without food, without shelter 
from the inclement storm, and deprived of every 
means of refuge, except a single boat, which, on 
account of the number of men and the violence of 
the storm, w T as incapable of conveying them to their 
ship. "Death stared them in the face whichever 
way they turned, and a division of opinion ensued. 
Some w r ere wishful to remain by the ice ; but it 
could afford them no shelter and would probably 
be soon broken to pieces by the increasing swell; 
others were anxious to attempt to join their ship 
whilst she was yet in sight; but the force of the 
wind, the violence of the sea, and the smallness of 
the boat, were objections which would have ap¬ 
peared insurmountable to any but men in a state of 
despair. Judging that, by remaining on the ice, 
death was but retarded for a few hours, as the ex¬ 
treme cold must eventually benumb their faculties, 
they determined to make the attempt of rowing to 
the ship. Poor souls! What must have been their 
sensations at this moment ? They made the daring 
experiment, when a few minutes trial convinced 
them that the attempt was impracticable. They 
then, with longing eyes, turned their efforts to¬ 
wards recovering the ice which they had left; but 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 117 

their utmost exertions proved unavailing. Every 
one of them now considered his doom as sealed: 
how great then must have been their delight, and 
how overpowering their sensations, when, at this 
critical juncture, a ship appeared in sight. She 
was advancing directly towards them; their voices 
were extended, and their flag displayed; though 
not heard, they were seen; and their mutual courses 
being so directed as to form the speediest union, 
a few minutes saw them in safety on the deck of 
the Lively. 

But we must draw these interesting anecdotes to 
a close, and we shall do so by epitomizing a narra¬ 
tive from the Journal of Mr. Gibson, surgeon of the 
Trafalgar, which especially illustrates the great and 
numerous dangers which arise from icebergs, or 
more properly ice-islands. “ August 12, 1822, 
four, p. M. Blowing a fresh gale with rain; the 
floe to which the ship was made fast set down 
under the lee-ice, so as to render our situation 
perilous. Towards midnight we became unexpec¬ 
tedly entangled among heavy pieces of ice and floes, 
where the ship received some severe blows on her 
beams. Finding it impossible to get out, we lay 
to, and in half an hour the ship was close beset. 
Though I retired to bed when the ship was enclosed, 
I expected every minute to he called to quit the 
ship. About three a. m., a large piece of ice press¬ 
ing on the ship opposite my bed-cabin, broke two 
or three of the timbers with a dismal noise. Think¬ 
ing all was over, I sprang out of bed. On going 


118 


DANGERS IN 


upon deck, I found to my great consternation that 
the ship was under an enormous pressure from nu¬ 
merous huge masses of ice surrounding her on all 
sides, without an opening of water sufficient for a 
boat within two miles: and no other ship was in 
sight, though the weather was clear. Most of the 
crew were providing for shipwreck, and many of 
the people were supplicating Divine Mercy for 
deliverance. At nine a. m. most gave up all hopes 
of saving the ship, and mine were very faint of 
saving ourselves. Four days’ allowance were cooked 
with all speed; other provisions were taken upon 
deck, and every thing of importance placed in 
readiness to be thrown on the ice. At eleven a. m., 
however, our drooping spirits were greatly revived 
by observing a slight relaxation of pressure; but 
in half an hour we were again thrown into despair 
by the return of the pressure. At noon, a man on 
the mast-head saw a ship (the Baffin), on which 
we instantly made signals of distress. At this 
time a dead silence prevailed throughout the ship; 
the crew looking on one another in awful suspense. 
At one time the pressure was so strong that the 
pannels of the captain’s state-room were forced out 
of their framing. About half an hour after this 
the ship was suddenly thrown iipon her larboard 
side, on which all hands sprang upon deck. I shall 
never forget the confusion of the poor men, nor their 
■wild looks when they gained the deck; for half of 
them were below at the time of the shock, and from 
the smallness of the hatch, only one could get up at 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 119 

a time. Some leaped upon the ship’s side and 
were going upon the ice, when the captain cried out 
to them to behave like men and stick to the ship 
as long as she remained above water! We all stood 
on that part of the ship nearest the ice, with our 
bags of clothing on our shoulders. For fifteen mi¬ 
nutes we had patiently waited our doom; when, 
by the interposition of Divine Providence, the wind 
changed,—the ice began to set off from the ship, and 
in fifteen minutes more she recovered her upright 
position. The water now rapidly spread among the 
surrounding ice, and, finally, the vessel was warped 
out and floated uninjured on the waves.” 

We add one other more recent and still more 
awful occurrence. It is pretty generally known that 
the year 1830 proved peculiarly disastrous to the 
whale fishery, in as much as nineteen British vessels 
were totally wrecked during the season, and twelve 
more materially damaged, at a computed loss of 
upwards of <£.142,000. Most of this injury was 
received in Baffin’s Bay, in the high latitude of Mel¬ 
ville Bay, and was principally caused by the ice being 
drifted in immense quantities among the vessels, 
and so agitated during a succession of storms as 
finally to overwhelm them. We have room only 
for a short extract, taken from the highly interest¬ 
ing account given in the Edinburgh Cabinet Li¬ 
brary (i. 448). “ A small squadron, consisting of 

six very fine vessels, in attempting a passage to the 
west side, encountered a fresh gale, which drove in 
upon them masses of ice, by which they were soon 


120 


DANGERS IN 


beset. They ranged themselves under the shelter 
of a large floe, having water barely sufficient to float 
them. Here they formed a line, one behind another, 
standing close, stem to stem, and being at the same 
time so pressed against the ice, that in some places a 
boat-hook could with difficulty he inserted in the in¬ 
terval. In the evening of the 24th the sky darkened, 
—the gale increased—the floes began to overlap each 
other, and closed upon the ships in an alarming 
manner. The sailors then attempted to saw out 
a sort of dock, where they hoped to be relieved from 
this severe pressure; but soon a huge floe was driven 
upon them, with a violence completely irresistible. 
The Eliza Swan of Montrose received the first 
shock, and was saved only by the ice raising her up. 
It next struck the St. Andrew of Aberdeen midship, 
breaking about twenty of her timbers, and staving 
a number of casks ; but it then fortunately moved 
along her side, and went off by the stern. Now, 
however, pursuing its career, it reached successively 
the Baffin of Leith; the Achilles of Dundee; the 
Ville de Dieppe, a French ship; and the Rattler of 
Leith, and dashed against them with such tremen¬ 
dous fury, that these four noble vessels, which had 
braved for years the tempests of the Polar deep, 
were, in a quarter of an hour, shattered into frag¬ 
ments. The scene was awful,—the grinding noise 
of the ice tearing upon their sides,—the masts break¬ 
ing off and falling in every direction—were added 
to the cries of two hundred sailors leaping upon the 
frozen surface, with only such portions of their 


CAPTURING THE WHALE. 


121 

clothes as they could snatch in a single instant. 
The Rattler is said to have become the most com¬ 
plete wreck almost ever known. She was literally 
turned inside-out; and her stem and stem carried 
to the distance of a gunshot from each other;—and 
the Achilles had her sides nearly pressed together, 
her stem thrust out, her decks and beams broken 
into innumerable pieces. It has been well observed, 
under such circumstances as these, that a ship, even 
the strongest which human art can construct, be¬ 
comes like an egg-shell, when opposed to the full 
force of so terrific an agent.” 


The only other species of this genus, which we 
shall bring under review, is the Bcdcena Australis , 
or 


VOL. VI. 


i 



122 


WHALE OF THE SOUTHERN SEAS. 

Balaena Australis, Desmoulins. —B. Antarctica, Lesson. 

This species, nearly up to the present period, has 
been confounded with the former, and probably we 
might still have been ignorant of the difference, had 
not M. de Lalande, during his residence at the 
Cape of Good Hope, succeeded by his energy and 
zeal in preparing one of these animals and trans¬ 
mitting its skeleton to France, where, on its arrival 
at the Jardin des Plantes , Cuvier soon detected its 
specific differences. 

The whale of the southern seas is decidedly 
smaller than that of the north, measuring usually 
thirty-five or forty-five feet, but frequently extend¬ 
ing to fifty feet. Its baleen, owing to the great 
curve of the upper jaw, appears to be relatively 
longer ; usually reaching to about nine feet in a fish 
of forty feet. The head is very frequently covered 
with barnacles, having layer above layer, so that its 
aspect is very different from the northern Mysti- 
cetus, being often of a white colour. The pectoral 
fins appear to be longer and more pointed, whilst 
the lobes of the tail are less marked than in the 
former species. When cleared of its covering of 
shells, it is of a uniform black colour. 

There seems to be good ground for supposing 


WHALE OF TOE SOUTHERN SEAS. 123 

that this is the whale which has been so extensively 
fished in the southern seas as the Mysticetus ; and 
that it was on its account that so many establish¬ 
ments were set agoing in many parts of the Brazils, 
which, after being carried on for a time witli great 
success, are now nearly abandoned; D’Orbigny 
states, that in 1834 the whales had nearly dis¬ 
appeared from this coast. They seem, however, to 
frequent many other places in abundance: they 
are found in the Bays off Terra del Fuego, and on 
the western coast of South America, and they are 
also found around New Holland as well as the coast 
of Africa. It is in the month of June they visit 
the Cape of Good Hope, principally the females, 
and for the purpose of bringing forth their young. 

The method of fishing this animal is very differ¬ 
ent from that we have been considering at such 
length, and is, upon the whole, a much more easy 
operation. According to Lesson, from whom we 
principally derive our account, this species is usually 
found at no great distance off the coast, and where 
the water is beginning to get shallow. When struck, 
it often dives to the bottom, the depth being seldom 
more than two hundred fathoms; it then returns 
to the surface after an interval of a few minutes; 
and occasionally dives a second, third, or even a 
fourth time. Sometimes it takes a horizontal course, 
and “ runs” along shore twenty or thirty miles in a 
direct line. When observed by others of the species, 
they usually take the alarm, and running off, are 
followed by the fast wdiale as long as it is able. 


124 


WHALE OP THE SOUTHERN SEAS. 


The harpooner generally endeavours to strike two 
harpoons at the first attack, both of which are at¬ 
tached to the same line, by which he has a double 
hold of the fish. The harpoons are usually thrown 
at the whale when at the distance of six or eight 
yards, and the lances, which are kept in fine order, 
are sometimes used in the same way. Two boats 
are considered sufficient to kill an individual of this 
species, so that, when it can be accomplished, two 
are struck at the same time. Whenever the animal 
re-appears on the surface, the fast boat is hoisted up 
towards it by means of the line ; thus affording an 
opportunity to the harpooner to lance it, and en¬ 
abling him often to capture his prize without the 
assistance of any other boat. 

When it is flensed, which is done in the same 
manner as in the sperm whale, to be afterwards de¬ 
scribed, the upper jaw, with all the baleen attached, 
is usually hoisted on board. The whalebone is then 
divided into junks, and these, at the first leisure, 
are subdivided into single blades and stowed away 
after the gum is removed. If a storm happen to 
arise before the fish is flensed, a hawser is fastened 
to it, and the ship rides by it; at the conclusion of 
the gale it is brought along side and “ cut in.” If, 
however, an interval of more than two or three days 
occur before the flensing is commenced, the whale 
swells, the blubber becomes impregnated with blood, 
and must be abandoned as useless. 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL 








































































125 


* 


Second Genus. —RORQUALUS.* 

Characters. No teeth ; baleen short; has a dorsal fin ; and 
folds under chin and throat. 


RORQUALIS BOREALIS, Cuv.; Less. 

PLATE V. 

Great Northern Rorqual.—Razor-back and Firmer, of whalers. 

Our readers will please to observe that we have, 
after the example of Cuvier, adopted the name Ror- 
qualus as a generic term, and include in this genus 
some species, or at least supposed species, with 
which some of them may be familiar. After the 
Mysticetus there followed, according to the pre¬ 
vailing arrangements, first a genus whose principal 
distinction was its being supplied with a dorsal fin; 
and then another, which, in addition to this third 
fin, had certain folds extending from the under lip 
along the chest and abdomen. Under the former of 
these was included the Gibbar of Lacepede, which 
was the same as the Physalis of Linnaeus, and the 
Razor-back of whalers; and under the latter, among 
others, there was the Jubartes of Lacepede, the 
Boops of Linnaeus, and also the Musculus of Lin- 

* Rorqmlus , in the Norwegian tongue, means whale with 
folds. 



126 GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 

naeus, the Broad-nosed whale, of Scorseby, and the 
Rorqual of Bonnaterre and Lacepede. 

But it admits not of a doubt, that, up to the 
present time, there exists not the vestige of evidence 
in the records of Cetology, of the existence of 
the gibbar or physalis. True it is that systematic 
writers give very circumstantial accounts of it, but 
few, if any, from their own observations; and Mr. 
Scorseby, in his interesting notices respecting it, says 
it is “ supplied with distinct rugae or sulci whence 
it clearly follows it is a true Rorqual. With regard 
to the specific differences assigned to the others, we 
shall only state, in a word, that as great difficulties 
and objections stand in the way of their being ad¬ 
mitted as established varieties. We do not expressly 
deny that some of them may be real species, and 
may differ from each other; but we assert, after the 
example of Cuvier, that these still remain to be 
pointed out and demonstrated; and in the meanwhile 
it will be understood, that the remarks which follow 
respecting this genus, apply to the facts really ascer¬ 
tained concerning all the forenamed alleged species. 

The northern Rorqual is the largest of the whale 
tribe, the mightiest giant of them all, and probably 
the most powerful and bulky of created beings. Its 
head is to the entire length, as one to four. It 
differs from the Mysticetus, in its body being longer 
and more slender; in its form being less cylindrical ; 
in having a dorsal fin ; in its skin or blubber being 
much thinner, usually not exceeding six inches; 
in its speed being greater, its action quicker and 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 127 

more restless, and its conduct bolder; in its blowing 
being more violent, and its baleen being much shorter 
and less valuable. 

The cause of this last important difference is very 
plain; and may be best illustrated by a glance at 
the accompanying sketches, in which there is a side 
view, fig. w, Plate i. of the head of the Mysticetus, 
and fig. o of the Rorqual. It will at once be 
seen that the upper jaw of the former is relatively 
larger and much more curved; the intervening 
space in both is filled with baleen, which accordingly 
must be long in the Mysticetus and short in the 
Rorqual; the longest laminaa seldom measuring four 
feet. 

In Mr. F. Knox's account of the great Rorqual, 
which will subsequently be more particularly al¬ 
luded to, we read that three hundred and fourteen 
plates were counted on each side; and on further 
examination it was found that these extended 
mesially (towards the middle line) only about 
fifteen inches, and w r ere then succeeded by a vast 
number of smaller plates, which gradually became 
less and less, till finally they were converted into 
bristles; so that, correctly speaking, there were pro¬ 
bably not fewer than four or five thousand distinct 
plates of whalebone. The baleen, when recent, was 
highly elastic and soft, the fringed edge being as 
pliable as the hair of the human head, and thus 
forming a sieve of the most perfect kind. From the 
same source w T e also learn, that the posterior arch of 
the palate was so large that it could admit a man, 


128 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 


being thus a great vestibule to the windpipe and 
gullet; which last was quite closed when first seen, 
and appeared as if it would admit with difficulty 
a man’s closed fist. 

Upon the whole, however, the baleen is coarser 
than in the Mysticetus, and the swallow is compa¬ 
ratively larger; and in both points this is a positive 
advantage to the Rorqual, and only in keeping with 
its requirements, because the proper food of this 
genus is not only the small medusa, shrimps, &c. 
which have been depicted on Plate m. as the food of 
the Mysticetus, but consists of medusa of a larger 
size, and of fish, such as herring, haddock, cod, 
salmon, &c .; and there seems no ground to question 
the opinion, that these whales often follow in the 
tract of these fish, and devour them in quantities 
which it would not be easy accurately to conceive. 
Thus M. Desmoulins states, that six hundred great 
cod and immense quantities of pilchards have been 
found in the stomach of a single whale of this 
genus.— Diet . Class. 

The plicae or folds, whence the genus derives its 
name, constitute a singular structure, the precise 
use of which has not hitherto been very clearly as¬ 
certained. John Hunter described it with his usual 
accuracy in one of the whales which he examined, 
and observed that it must increase the dilatability 
and elasticity of the integuments of the part, but 
confessed he could not perceive wherefore this 
should be, or how it was made useful. Lacepede 
also particularly describes it, and it has since been 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 129 

generally mentioned by subsequent authors. It 
consists of a number of longitudinal folds, nearly 
parallel, which commence under the lower lip, oc¬ 
cupying the space between the two branches of the 
lower jaw, passes down the throat, covering the 
whole extent of the chest, from one pectoral fin to 
the other, and somewhat further, and terminates far 
down the abdomen. It often happens that two of 
these folds are distinct at their extremities, but form 
one only in the middle portion. They are of different 
width according to the size of the individual, varying 
from half an inch to two or three inches. The 
external portion of these folds is of the colour of 
the neighbouring skin, whilst the parts which are 
usually folded in are of a more delicate appearance, 
generally of a pale white, and in some species of a 
beautiful red colour, corresponding to that of the 
lip. M. Lacepede congratulates himself on having 
made a great discovery respecting the use of this 
structure, which suggested itself whilst examining 
certain drawings which were transmitted to him by 
Sir Joseph Banks. He supposes it to be a great 
bladder placed between the branches of the lower 
jaw, extending far underneath the body; and con¬ 
ceives the whale can fill this pouch with atmospheric 
air from the spiracles, so 'as to give it a circum¬ 
ference of ten or twelve feet. In short, he considers 
it as a kind of swimming bladder, by which the 
animal raises itself at will towards the surface; and 
by it he accounts for the extraordinary agility and 
power it displays, in the pursuit and capture of its 

VOL. VI. K 


130 GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 

prey. One of liis plates, his eighth, is supplied for 
the express purpose of illustrating its appearance 
and size. This account seems generally to have 
been received, and is propagated in our latest English 
and foreign treatises ; and yet we are persuaded 
that it is wholly erroneous. No description has 
been given of the canal which conveys the air into 
the sack; anatomical observation contradicts the 
assertion, and the bladder exhibited in the plates 
appears to be nothing more than gas generated by 
decomposition, and collected in the loose cellular 
membrane of the lower jaw, as it rapidly does in 
other parts of the body. We may add, that the pro¬ 
cess of its formation has been actually witnessed by 
Messrs. Quoy and Gaimard. A whale of this species 
was killed by the crew of the vessel in which they 
sailed. When alive, and during the next day, the 
mouth was shut. The day after, this reputed swim¬ 
ming bladder began to appear, and speedily it pre¬ 
sented an insuperable obstacle to the shutting of the 
jaws ( Voyage , p. 83). The simplest seems the most 
plausible, as it is probably the correct account of the 
matter. The Rorqual has not, in the upper jaw, 
that large segment of a circle in which the Mysti- 
, cetus collects its food; but to compensate for this, 
has it in the lower: when it opens its prodigious 
mouth, the water, rushing in, opens these folds, and 
so forms, as it were, a great well in which its prey 
is collected; on shutting its mouth and contracting 
the folds, it expels the water, whilst the strainer 
formed by the baleen retains the fish, &c. which 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 131 

forms its food, and which now become a suitable 
morsel, as they are an easy prey*. 

This animal attains the vast length of from one 
hundred to one hundred and ten feet,—Sir A. Capel 
Brooke says, one hundred and twenty (Lapland , 
141) ; with a circumference of thirty or forty, which 
is the same as that of the Mysticetus. Mr. Scorseby 
remarks, it is seen apparently of the length of a ship, 
that is, from ninety to an hundred and ten feet 
(Thomsons Ann. of Phil. vi. 314); and, as will 
presently appear, it lias more than once been actually 
measured at one hundred and five feet. The body 
is not cylindrical, hut compressed at the sides, and 
angular on the hack. The head is small when com¬ 
pared with the former genus, and the tail is relatively 
somewhat less broad. The dorsal fin is small, and 
placed opposite the vent; the pectorals are con¬ 
siderably distant from the angles of the lips and are 
slender, straight, and pointed at the extremities. 
The blubber is usually about six or eight inches 
thick, and does not yield above eight or ten tons of 
oil, sometimes none at all; its colour is a pale bluish 
black, or dark bluish grey, somewhat resembling a 
sucking Mysticetus. 

Its blowing is very violent, and may be heard in 
calm weather at a great distance. Though this 
species is sometimes mistaken for the Mysticetus, 
yet its appearance and action are so different that 
it may generally be distinguished. It seldom lies 
quietly on the water when blowing, but usually has 

* See, too, p. 143. 


132 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 


a velocity of four or five miles an liour; and when 
it descends, it ver f rarely throws its tail in the air, 
which is the general practice of the other. 

The Rorqual occurs in great numbers in the Arctic 
Seas, especially along the edge of the ice between 
Clierie Island and Nova Zembla, and also near Jan 
Mayen. Persons trading to Archangel have often 
mistaken it for the common whale. It is seldom 
seen amidst much ice, and seems to he avoided by 
the Mysticetus; and the whalers therefore view its 
appearance with concern. It inhabits most generally 
in the Spitzhergen quarter, the parallel of from 70° 
to 76° ’> hut in summer, when the sea is open, it 
advances to the northward as high as the 80° of 
latitude. 

The Rorqual swims with a velocity at the greatest 
of about twelve miles an hour. It is by no means 
a timid animal, and usually does not appear to be 
revengeful or mischievous. When closely pursued 
by boats it manifests little fear, and does not attempt 
to outstrip them in the race, but merel/ endeavours 
to avoid them, by diving and changing its direction. 
If harpooned, or otherwise wounded, it then exerts 
all its energies, and escapes with its utmost velocity. 
Thus, we can readily credit the story related by 
Martin, of the sailors of a small vessel having fixed 
their harpoon in one of these Cetae, when it darted 
off with extreme velocity, so.much to the astonish¬ 
ment and surprise of all on board, that, panic struck, 
they lost all self-possession, omitted to cut the fatal 
cord which connected them to the animal, and 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 133 

were drawn under a vast bank of heavy ice, where 
they all perished. This great speed and activity 
renders this species a dangerous object of attack, 
whilst the small quantity of oil it affords makes 
it unworthy of the general attention of fishers. 
When struck, it frequently drags the fast boat almost 
immediately beyond the reach of assistance, and 
speedily out of sight both of boats and ship. Hence 
the striker is under the necessity of cutting, the line, 
and sacrificing his employers property, for securing 
the safety of himself and companions. “ I have 
made,” says Mr. Scorseby, “ different attempts to 
capture one of these formidable creatures. In the year 
1818,1 ordered a general chase, providing against the 
danger of having my crew separated from the ship, by 
appointing a rendezvous on shore, not far distant, and 
preparing against the loss of much line by dividing 
it at two hundred fathoms from the harpoon, and 
affixing a buoy at the end of it. Thus arranged, one 
of these whales was harpooned by a shot from the 
harpoon-gun, and another was struck in the com¬ 
mon method. The former dived with such impe¬ 
tuosity, that the line was broken by the resistance 
of the buoy as soon as it was thrown into the water; 
and the other was liberated within a minute by the 
division of the line, occasioned, it was supposed, by 
the friction against the dorsal fin. Both escaped. 
Another was struck by one of my inexperienced har- 
pooners, who mistook it for a Mysticetus. It dived 
obliquely with such velocity, that 2880 feet of line 
were withdrawn from the boat in about a minute of 


134 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 


time. This whale was also lost by the breaking of 
the line.” 

Sometimes, though rarely it would appear, this 
species manifests a tendency to retaliate against 
its pursuers, and especially when those endeared 
to it are attacked. We speak not merely of the 
affection of the mother for its young; the fol¬ 
lowing narrative occurs in Lacepede, and seems 
to exhibit no common share of conjugal regard.— 
“ The male and female of this species (the jubarte),” 
he remarks, “ seem united by the strongest bands of 
affection. Duhamel reports that two were taken in 
1723, which were swimming along together*, and 
•were probably male and female. The one which 
remained free exhibited much uneasiness on its com¬ 
panion being wounded; it then swam to the boat, 
and with one stroke of its tail killed three men and 
precipitated them into the sea. The two remained 
to the last in close company with each other; and 
when the one was killed, the other uttered lamentable 
and terrible cries.” 

But though the regular whalers usually decline 
all encounter with this species, yet it is not so with 
the natives of the polar regions, whose wants compel 
them to make every exertion which promises the 
least success, and whose circumstances are frequently 
peculiarly favourable. In Lapland they sometimes 
yield fifteen tons of oil, and are worth about £.150. 
—(Brookes Lapland , 141.) We have met with 
two accounts of their mode of attacking it. Thus 
the late Sir Charles Giesecki states that the following 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 135 

is the method which the native Greenlanders take 
of seeming some of the smaller animals of this 
species (the Balaena Boops), which frequent their 
coasts in the summer months. Both men and 
women engage in the adventure, the former in their 
kayacks, the latter in their bomiaks. The men in 
their light skiffs follow the whale as close as possible, 
mid continue to throw as many harpoons and lances 
into him as possible, until he dies of loss of blood; 
they then join their canoes together, fasten their 
spoil to them, and carry their booty home, where 
it is faithfully divided (Art. Greenland , Edin. En- 
cyeloped.) ; in the words of one of the most power¬ 
ful mid interesting poets of the present day: 

Trained with inimitable art to float, 

Each balanced in his bubble of a boat, 

With dexterous paddle steering through the spray, 

With poised harpoon to strike his plunging prey ; 

As if the skiff, the seamen, oar, and dart, 

Were one compacted body, by one heart 
With instinct, motion, pulse empow’red to ride 
A human nautilus upon the tide. 

Montgomery's Greenland. 

Sir Arthur de Capell Brooke gives a somewhat 
different account of its mode of capture by the 
Laplanders on the Finmark coast. They pursue 
the animal with all the strength the party can 
muster, and wounding it as severely and rapidly 
as possible, they leave it. For the time, it escapes 
them; but, in the course of a few days, it is 
generally found dead on some part of the neigh- 


136 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 


bouring coast. The person who finds it imme¬ 
diately gives notice, and those who were engaged 
in the hunt come and identify their property by 
their name or mark on the instruments employed. 
The finder is then rewarded with a third of the 
booty, to which he is by law entitled, whilst the 
remainder is shared among the rest. (Travels in 
Norway, 300). 

As herring and other fish are the occasional if 
not habitual food of the Rorqual, and as these often 
resort to the estuaries of our rivers and the enclosed 
and shallow bays of our coasts, where they are keenly 
pursued by the whales, it not unfrequently happens 
that even these immense monsters are taken by 
surprise, left by the retiring tide, and stranded on 
the shore. A curious fact is on record with regard 
to one individual, seventy-eight feet long, who had 
been for long a keen hunter, and was at last sur¬ 
prised and cast away. The circumstance, as nar¬ 
rated by Sir Robert Sibbald in his Phalainologia, 
took place at Abercorn in the Frith of Forth in 
September 1692. This individual had been for 
twenty years known to the fishermen from its pur¬ 
suit and capture of herring, and had been termed by 
them “ the hollie pike” because there w r as a hole in 
its dorsal fin, which had been produced by a musket 
ball, and therefore supplied a very distinguishing 
mark. Its death was considered by them as a 
subject of great joy. It has also been frequently 
observed, that on an exposed coast, after a great 


GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 


137 

storm, some of these Cetss were cast ashore, injured 
by the tremendous sea, or dead from some accidental 
cause. When an event of this sort takes place in a 
populous district, it never fails to prove at least a 
nine days’ wonder, and crowds from far and near 
are attracted to behold what no description can ever 
adequately represent. These occurrences have some¬ 
times proved eras in the science, and we shall there¬ 
fore give a list of the principal of those we have met 
with in the records of Cetology. 

As already hinted, two have been observed which 
measured one hundred and five feet. One of these 
was found dead, as mentioned by Scorseby, in Davis 
Straits (Arct. Reg. i. 481); and Captain Clarke 
measured the skeleton of one near the Columbia 
River, which extended to one hundred and five feet. 
Allowing five or six feet for the tail, this appears to 
be the largest animal of which we have an accurate 
measurement (Travels to the Missouri by Captains 
Lewis and Clarice , p. 422). 

2, 105 feet, as above. 

1, 101 feet, stranded on the banks of the Humber in 1750. 

1, 95 feet, carried into Ostend in 1827. 

1, 84 feet, stranded at Boyne in Banffshire at close of 
seventeenth century, as mentioned by Sir R. Sibbald. 
1, 83 feet, conveyed to North Berwick in 1831. Messrs. 
Knox’s. 

1, 82 feet, embayed and killed in Balta Bay, Shetland, in 
1817. 

1, 78 feet, at Abercom, as above alluded to, in 1692. 

2, 70 feet \ one on the coast of Cornwall in 1797, the other 

on west coast of Ireland in 1825. Jac. Dub. Phil, 
Jour. i. 

VOL. VI. L 


i 


138 GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 

1, 63 feet, conveyed into Brighton in 1830. Loudon's Ma¬ 
gazine^ iv. 163. 

1, 57 feet, at Rochefort, in 1827 ; Souty, in Lesson, 345. 

1, 52 feet, at Eyemouth, Berwickshire, 1752. 

2, 46 feet; one at Burntisland, 1690, Sibbald; ditto, 1761, 

Dr. Walker, recorded by Dr. Neil. 

1, 43 feet, near Alloa, Frith of Forth, 1808. Dr. Neil. 
Besides various others whose dimensions are not given, or 
smaller than the above, on the coast of Ireland, in the Western 
Isles, the Orkneys, in the Thames, the coast of Holland, &c. 


Many of the occurrences above alluded to were 
of great moment, in as much as they afforded an 
opportunity which men of zeal and science im¬ 
proved, in the more particular examination of the 
structure of the order, and thereby improved our 
acquaintance with them: they thus became land¬ 
marks in the acquisition of knowledge, at which 
those who laboured acquired for themselves a well 
merited and substantial praise. 

In no instance has this zeal been more conspi¬ 
cuous, than as it was excited by No. 5 in the 
above list, found in the neighbourhood of North 
Berwick in 1831. It was immediately purchased by 
the present proprietors, Dr. Knox and his brother, 
Mr. Frederick Knox, the latter of whom superin¬ 
tended the process of flensing, and for more than 
three years with praiseworthy assiduity, carried 
on the preparation of the skeleton, and of some 
of the soft parts, which were exhibited in 1835, in 
Edinburgh and Glasgow, to the admiration of thou¬ 
sands. To the former of these gentlemen, especially, 
men of science will look for some interesting addi- 


THE GJ^EAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 


c r. 

W 

£ 

1-3 

o 

fe; 


fcl 

R* 

§ 

it 



PLATE 6’. 




































GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 


139 


tions to the present stock of information on this 
subject ; and to both of them we are indebted for 
the liberty they have given ns of supplying the ac¬ 
companying accurate representation of the skeleton 
(Plate vi.), which cannot but interest our readers, 
and for which we thus beg them to accept our best 
thanks. 

According to the short account published by 
Mr. F. Knox, the following are a few of the measure¬ 
ments of the specimen: 

Total length of the skeleton . 78 feet 

Length of the head over the vertex 21 — 

Length of the bone of the cranium 19 —- 

Length of the vertebral column . 57 — 

Number of vertebras . . .65 

Number of ribs . . . .15 pair 

Length of longest rib, the 6th . . 11 feet 

Weight of the skeleton . . .28 tons. 

The larger vertebrae were fourteen inches in the 
diameter of their bodies, and from six to seven feet 
from tip to tip of their transverse processes; they 
gradually lessened towards the tail, till they did not 
exceed a hens egg in bulk. A vertical section of 
the skull exhibited a part of its walls more than 
three feet in thickness. 

It is a specimen of the same species, No. 4 of the 
above list, which forms our Plate v., the skeleton 
of which was exhibited in London in 1833, and 
is now we believe being exhibited throughout the 
United States of America. We apprehend we may 
safely state this to be the skeleton of the largest 
animal that has ever been preserved, and, like the 


] 40 GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 

former, could not be bebeld without exciting the 
liveliest astonishment. It was a female. 


The total length was ... 95 feet 

Length of the head . . . 22 — 

Length of lower jaw-bone . . 25 — 

Length of the spine . . . 69 — 

Weight of the skeleton . . 35 tons. 


And as animals of these gigantic dimensions are 
sometimes cast ashore in our day, so were they 
many centuries ago in other countries, and probably 
of other genera. A curious notice is made on this 
point, at a very early date in the records of history. 
Nearchus, general to Alexander the Great, under¬ 
took, as is well known, a voyage from the mouth 
of the Indus to the Persian Gulf in the year 327 
before the common era. In this perilous voyage 
Nearchus coasted along the country of the Iehthyo- 
pagi, considered by Ptolemy as a part of Karmania. 
In his narrative we are informed that these people 
live generally in small cabins, the better sort only 
having houses, which are constructed of the bones 
of whales thrown upon the coast. When the flesh 
is rotted off they make planks and doors of such as 
are flat, and beams and rafters of the ribs and jaw¬ 
bones ; and many of the monsters, it is said, are 
found a hundred and fifty feet in length. Strabo 
confirms this statement of Arrian. (Vincent’s 
Nearchus.—-Kerr s Voyages , xviii. 71*) 

We cannot dismiss this short notice respecting 
the stranding of the Cetae, and be it remarked they 
are not always of the size indicated in the table, 
without stating that the circumstance may always be 



GREAT NORTHERN RORQUAL. 141 

turned to an important economical purpose in con¬ 
nexion with agriculture. It is well known that the 
richest manure is formed from decayed animal matter, 
and hence the great yalue of bone manure as an article 
of commerce and of increased productiveness. Now, 
no animal matter can exceed in richness that which 
is supplied by the fatty matter so abundantly con¬ 
tained throughout the whole frame, hones and all, 
of the Cetacea. Hence the late Sir John Sinclair, 
with that enthusiasm for his country’s good which 
ever characterized him, called the attention of the 
agriculturist to this subject; and, more lately, 
Mr. William Bell has supplied an interesting notice 
to the Quarterly Journal of Agriculture, vol. i., 
concerning the use of dreg , or coarse whale oil, in 
converting peat moss, &c. into rich manure, and 
finally into fine mould. His experiments on this 
point were highly successful, and the result of his 
promised additional observations will he esteemed 
by the practical farmer. 


142 


THE LESSER RORQUAL. 

PLATE VII. 

\ 

Rorqualus Minor, Knox .-—Bal. Rostrata, Fab., Hunter .— 
Balsenoptera Acuto-Rostrata, Laoepede , Scorseby . 

For the undisputed establishment of this species, 
the scientific world is indebted to the zeal and assi¬ 
duity of Dr. Knox ; to whom, and also to his 
brother, our readers, and still more we ourselves, 
are especially indebted for the accompanying repre¬ 
sentation of a striking drawing in the possession of 
the latter gentleman. It is true that Fabricius de¬ 
scribed this species with his accustomed elegance 
and precision; Mr. Hunter likewise met with and 
delineated it, having probably examined it with care, 
as he makes frequent allusion to it in his published 
works; Mr. Scorseby s work also contains an exact 
representation, supplied through Dr. Trail. But 
notwithstanding all this, the details collected were 
so meagre and slight, that not only were much 
ignorance and error prevalent concerning it, hut 
many naturalists, of whom Cuvier, in 1823, was 
one, were led to doubt even its existence: “ Mais 
qui oserait soutenir que ces dfferences ne venoient 
pas de 1’age.” (Oss. Foss. v. 366.) 

Dr. Knox's specimen was taken in February, 


THE LESSER RORQTIAJ 



PLATE 






























































































































THE LESSER RORQUAL. 143 

1834, near Queensferry, Frith of Forth. It was a 
young one, measuring only ten feet. On obtaining 
possession of it, Dr. K. thought of suspending it 
horizontally as in the posture of swimming. “ By 
this means,” he remarks, “ the proper character of 
the head and mouth were given, and this so much 
altered the appearance of the animal, that the author 
thinks all previous views extremely incorrect, be¬ 
sides tending to mislead the naturalist as to the real 
capacity of the mouth of the genus, which is really 
very great. The lower part of the mouth is an 
enormous pouch or hag which, in the great northern 
Rorqual, must at times contain an incredible volume 
of' water. The tongue was free towards the apex, 
almost as much as in man.” (Notice of a Paper 
read to Royal Soc. of Edin.) 

Passing by this observation on the tongue, which, 
so far as we know, is original, we cannot but felici¬ 
tate our readers on the simple hut ingenious thought 
which led this gentleman to place the individual as 
much as possible in its natural position, whereby, 
we agree with him, a new character was given to 
the appearance of its most striking feature, and 
every thing like doubt removed concerning the true 
use of that peculiar structure, which hitherto has 
perplexed all naturalists who have directed their 
attention to it. It was from this discovery that, 
when treating of the Great Rorqual (on p. 1.31), we 
did not hesitate to assign this use, viz. that of a 
pouch for augmenting the capacity of the mouth to 
the part; and no adequate judge, we apprehend. 


144 


THE LESSER RORQUAL. 


can look at the Plate, without being irresistibly 
impressed with the conviction that this is its true 
and appropriate use. This examination has also, 
we apprehend, put an end to all the idle hypotheses 
concerning the alleged swimming bladder under the 
tongue, which were grounded on a mistake of Sir 
Joseph Banks, which was at once rejected by John 
Hunter, hut which has misled the accurate Lesson, 
as well as more recent writers on the subject. 

But we have yet to state how Dr. Knox esta¬ 
blished that the Lesser Rorqual must be considered 
as a distinct species. He has done so as a com¬ 
parative anatomist, in a single instance, and for 
ever. We have already expressed our obligations 
to him as the proprietor of the skeleton of the Great 
Rorqual; he also possesses that of the one now 
under review, and the examination of their osteo- 
logy gives the following result: 



Vertebrae, 

cervical. 

Dorsal. 

Remaining. 

Great Rorqual 

7 

13 

43 

Smaller ditto 

7 

11 

30 


Total. 

63 

48 


Other differences than those involved in this single 
statement might be mentioned, which quite agree 
with more popular observations; but these, at this 
time, must suffice. 

Before laying Dr. K.’s short notice aside, we must 
introduce his remarks concerning the valves of the 
spiracles. “ Two bolster-like substances filled the 
canals, which are withdrawn from them at the 
moment of breathing, by muscles provided for that 






THE LESSER RORQUAL. 


145 


purpose; the mechanism is admirable, and would 
sustain a pressure from above, though the animal 
were to descend thousands of fathomsalso con - 
ceming that mass of vascular tissue, closely resem¬ 
bling the “ erectile,” which he discovered within 
the cranium; “ it filled a very large proportion of 
the interior of the cranium, extending thence into 
the spinal canal, three-fourths of whose cavity it 
also occupiedand finally, his statement “ that its 
olfactory nerves were at least as large as those of 
man.” All these observations suggest many im¬ 
portant considerations, on which our space forbids 
us to enter, but which we trust wall speedily be 
offered to the public by this indefatigable observer. 

We have already stated that the specimen now 
before us was a young one. Both Mr. Hunter’s and 
that supplied by Dr. Trail measured seventeen feet; 
another taken at Cherbourg, mentioned by Lace- 
pede, was fifteen feet: twenty-five is stated as the 
ordinary limit of its length, and it is therefore the 
smallest of the known Rorquals. We refer to our 
plate as a substitute for all remarks on its external 
characters. Its baleen is white and short; the rosy 
tint of the plicas was mentioned by Fabricius, whose 
account is still the best we have seen. It frequents 
the rocky bays of Greenland, especially during sum¬ 
mer, and also the coasts of Iceland and Norway; 
sometimes, though rarely, coming into lower lati¬ 
tudes. Its food is the arctic salmon and other fish. 
In its habits it is very active; so much so, that 
though much valued in northern climates for the 
VOL. vi. M 


146 


THE LESSER RORQUAL. 


esteemed delicacy of its flesh, yet the natives never 
attempt to harpoon it. They wound it with their 
darts and spears, and, after a fortunate hunt, hope 
to discover it, dead and stranded. Its oil also is 
regarded as peculiarly delicate, and is esteemed by 
the Icelanders as an article of their Materia Medica. 


RORQUAL OF THE SOUTHERN SEAS. 

Rorqualus Australis, Cuvier .—Baloenoptera Australis, Lesson. 

As after our account of the Greenland whale we 
added a few remarks concerning another mysticetus, 
which was an inhabitant of the southern seas, so 
the only other existing species of rorqual we shall 
here introduce to the notice of our readers, is one 
which within these few years has been discovered 
in the Southern Ocean, and ascertained to he a new 
and distinct species. These discoveries recall to 
mind an interesting remark of Buflbn’s, in which he 
states, that every part of the globe, according to 
its parallel of latitude, has animals peculiar to itself. 
It is true, this law has not very frequently been 
demonstrated in reference to the inhabitants of the 
ocean, although it has been remarked that the 
place of their habitation is to be reckoned, not by 
the sea which they frequent, but rather by the 
latitude; and hence it is alleged, that the intertro- 


RORQUAL OF THE SOUTHERN SEAS. 147 

pical zone includes the same species throughout its 
whole circumference, and that as we remove from 
it, both northward and southwards, each parallel 
has its peculiar varieties, whose limits are terminated 
by the different meridians of the glohe. In the 
present state of our knowledge, it would be going 
too far to affirm that none of the Cetacea plough 
the wave indifferently in every clime, but, as we have 
seen, Mr. Scorsehy decidedly states the mysticetus 
has never been seen in European seas; and since 
that time, it has been proved that there is both a 
distinct mysticetus and rorqual in the Southern 
Ocean. This then is sufficient to excite renewed 
attention to the subject, and the inquiry should 
henceforward be prosecuted with fresh zeal. 

The Southern Rorqual was first examined at the 
Cape of Good Hope by M. Delalande. Its most 
evident peculiarity is a long dorsal fin, which, instead 
of being placed near the tail, is situated immediately 
over the pectorals. The body is black above and 
pure white beneath, except within the folds, which 
are of a well marked rosy hue. Cuvier has ac¬ 
curately detailed the differences in the osteology, 
and to his work we shall refer the scientific reader 
(Oss. Foss. v. 372); only remarking it has seven 
cervical vertebrae, fourteen dorsal, and fourteen pair 
of ribs, and thirty-one lumber and caudal, making 
a total of fifty-two vertebrae. 

The Southern Rorqual but rarely approaches the 
coasts of the Cape, since it is stated that only two 
or three are observed « there during the year; nor 


148 RORQUAL OP THE SOUTHERN SEAS. 

does any one think of pursuing it, since its great 
power and velocity make it difficult and dangerous 
of capture, and the product by no means repays the 
risk and labour. 

It is manifestly this species which Dr. Foster 
states that he encountered near Terra del Fuego, 
when returning to England with the illustrious 
Cook. As illustrative of its habits we shall give an 
extract:— 44 When between Terra del Fuego and 
Statten Island, Lieutenant Pickersgill was sent into 
Success Bay, and on this occasion it was remarked 
that no less than thirty large whales played about 
them in the water. Whenever they were seen 
blowing to windward, the whole ship was infected 
with a most destestable rank and poisonous stench, 
which went off in the space of two or three minutes. 
Sometimes these huge animals lay on their backs, 
and with their long pectoral fins beat the surface of 
the sea, which always caused a great noise, equal to 
the explosion of a swivel. This kind of play has 
doubtless given rise to the mariners’ story of a fight 
between the thresher and the whale; the former of 
which is said to leap out of the water in order to 
fall heavily upon the latter. Here we had an op¬ 
portunity of observing the same exercise many times 
repeated, and discovered that all the belly and under 
side of the fins and tail are of a white colour, 
whereas the rest is black. As we happened to be 
only sixty yards from one of these animals, we 
perceived a number of longitudinal furrows on its 
belly. Besides flapping with their fins in the water 


RORQUAL OF THE SOUTHERN SEAS. 149 

these unwieldy animals, of forty feet in length, some¬ 
times fairly leapt into the air, and dropt down again 
with a heavy fall. The prodigious quantity of 
power required to raise such a vast creature out of 
the water is astonishing, and their peculiar economy 
cannot but give room to much reflection.” (Cook’s 
in Kerrs Voyages , xv. 4.) 

Though not without some hesitation, yet we are 
inclined to believe that this is the species which by 
the southern whalers is denominated the black fish 
or black whale , and which most frequently they are 
solicitous to avoid. It is this whale which Captain 
Colnett states that he saw, in innumerable shoals, 
on the shores of California. (Voy.to the S. Pacific.) 

One other of the habits of this species we shall 
mention. The black fish, of all other whales, most 
frequently place themselves in a perpendicular posi¬ 
tion, with the head only above water, presenting in 
this position a most extraordinary appearance when 
seen from a distance, resembling large black rocks in 
the midst of the ocean; this posture they seem to 
assume for the purpose of surveying more perfectly, 
or more easily, the surrounding expanse. (Beale.) 

The southern seas supply the appropriate food of 
these whales in the richest luxuriance. Thus, 
M. Lesson, who spent a considerable time in these 
latitudes, states, that the whale does not so much 
seek its food as its food seeks it. The sea is often 
very rough, and the height and violence of the 
waves is such, that the spray in breaking over the 
vessel brings along with it great quantities of medusa 


150 RORQUAL OF THE SOUTHERN SEAS. 

and flying fish. It is under these circumstances 
that these giants are most active, as if enjoying the 
storm, and then appear busiest in pursuing their 
prey. 


FOSSILE RORQUALS, ETC. 

We have already hinted that most of the Cetacea 
have been found in a fossile state, and we scarcely 
know any thing which is more calculated to de¬ 
monstrate the extraordinary revolutions which have 
taken place on the surface of the globe, than the fact 
that specimens of these great whales are now to be 
found in the bowels of the earth, in the centre of 
mighty continents, and elevated high in vast ranges 
of mountains. Thus there are distinct records of 
portions of skeletons of whales having been dis¬ 
covered on the continent of Europe, as well as in 
various parts of Britain, &c. 

One of these was discovered by M. Cortesi in 
1806 on the east flank of Monte Pulgnasco , one of the 
Apennines, about six hundred feet under the summit, 
which is itself elevated twelve hundred feet above the 
neighbouring plain. In this part, the hill consists of 
regular beds of bluish clay, inclined towards the north, 
and filled with marine shells. The whale was found 
lying in the same direction with the strata which in¬ 
closed it, the head pointing northwards. This skele¬ 
ton was nearly perfect, although some of the ribs were 
somewhat out of their proper position. The vertebras 
were lying on the right side; a great many teeth of 


FOSSILE RORQUALS, ETC« 


151 


a small species of stark, and innumerable shells 
surrounded it, especially a small variety of oyster, 
many of which were attached to the left side of the 
vertebrae, lying uppermost. The regular attachment 
of these oysters is well worthy of consideration, as it 
goes to show that they must have been fixed to their 
position while alive, and consequently, that the ske¬ 
leton had long lain at the bottom of the ocean. 

The head is six feet long, and the vertebras 
occupied a space of fifteen feet, giving twenty-one 
feet for the whole length of the skeleton. Ac¬ 
cording to Cuvier, the form of the head presents, at 
one and the same time, all the characters of a new 
sub-genus and of a distinct species. The other 
hones agree with the indications supplied by the 
cranium. It had twelve pair of ribs, the largest of 
which, along its convexity, was three feet seven 
inches ; the vertebrae were forty-one in number. In 
the Diet. Class. d’Hist. Nat. this species is denomi¬ 
nated Balcma Cuvieri by M. Desmoulins. 

M. Cortesi discovered another skeleton in 1816, 
in the same kind of strata, and in a neighbouring 
valley. It was not in such good preservation, and 
could not so easily be disengaged from the surround¬ 
ing rock. Its head was only four feet long, and 
the total length twelve feet, five inches. It was 
situated at a lower level than the other, at 1200 
feet under the summit of Monte Pulgnasco, and 
1400 feet under that of Monte Grogo, the two 
nearest hills. This has been designated, by the 
authority last quoted, B. Cortesii. 


152 FOSSILE RORQUALS, ETC. 

A cetaceous animal of much larger dimensions 
was discovered in 1775 in Paris. A wine merchant 
in La Rue Dauphine, while cutting trenches in his 
cellar, discovered a fossile bone of considerable 
dimensions in a yellowish and sandy clay, which 
appears to he the natural soil of the locality. 
Solicitous to spare the labour necessary for its en¬ 
tire extraction, he broke it, and raised a portion 
weighing two hundred weight. This attracted the 
attention of the curious; a cast was taken by 
Lamanon, and a sketch and description were pub¬ 
lished in the Jour, de Physique for 1781. This 
cast, with additional sketches, fell into the hands of 
Cuvier, and he, with that success which attended 
all his labours in this department, detected it to be 
a portion of the right temporal bone of a whale. 
He compared it with corresponding portions of 
others, and concluded that the length of its head 
was about sixteen feet, and that the total length 
of the animal to which it belonged could not be 
less than fifty-four feet, without including the tail 
or lips, which would raise its size to about sixty 
feet. Cuvier moreover remarks, that although this 
size agrees with that of the mysticetus, yet the 
details of the shape, and the comparison of the pro¬ 
portions, indicated decided differences. His con¬ 
clusion is, that, according to all appearance, this 
fragment belongs to a cetaceous animal of a species 
which is unknown, even among fossiles. 

Several remains of fossile whales of great dimen¬ 
sions have been discovered, deposited in marine 


FOSSILE RORQUALS, ETC. 


153 


diluvium in various parts of Scotland. Three in¬ 
stances of this sort have been particularly pointed 
out. One of these occurred at Airthrey, on the 
Forth, near Alloa. The bones belonging to an animal 
about seventy-two feet long, were imbedded in clay, 
twenty feet higher than the surface of the highest 
tide of the river Forth at the present day; and are 
now deposited in the Royal Edinburgh Museum- 
See “ Mr Bald on the Skeleton of a Whale,” Edin. 
Phil. Jour. i. 393. Another consisted of one ver¬ 
tebra only, found twelve feet above the level of 
the sea at Strathpeffer, Ross-shire, as described by 
Sir George Mackenzie in vol. x. of the Edin. Phil. 
Trans. The third was found at Dunmore Park, 
Stirlingshire. The bones of this specimen belong 
to an individual seventy or seventy-five feet long; 
and are imbedded in clay twenty feet higher than 
the present level of the Forth.— Edin.'Phil. Jour. 
xi. p. 220. 415. The exact species to which these 
remains belong has not yet been determined. 

In Loudon’s Magazine for 1831, p. 164, the fol¬ 
lowing statement occurs :—“ Mr. Manted, about two 
years ago, discovered, on Brighton Cliffs, part of a 
jaw-bone, nine feet long, of a whale in a fossile state. 
It was lying included in the ancient diluvial shingle of 
the cliff, in which the teeth and bones of elephants are 
' also found.” This chcumstance is mentioned by Mr. 
Mantell in his Geology of the South-east of England , 
. 1833, p. 42. He moreover states that a narwhal and 

porpoise have been found in alluvial deposits of the 
district; but scarcely any particulars are given. 

VOL. IV. N 


N 


154 


f 


Third Genus— CACHALOT. * 

The general characters which belong to this genus are the great 
head, but no baleen •, teeth in the lower jaw only ; spiracle 
single ; supplying the spermaceti and ambergris of com- > 
merce, 

THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 

PLATE VIII. 

Cachalot, Cuvier .—Physeter Catadon. Linn .—Grand Cachalot, 
Bonnat .—Cachalot Macroeephalus, Lacepede , Deimaret , &c. 

Some of our readers may perhaps he surprised that 
under the generic term Cachalot we introduce to 
their notice only one species of this variety of whale. 
This we do, not because we deny the existence of 
others; far from it, hut only because these others 
have not hitherto been accurately described or esta¬ 
blished. Desmaret but a few years ago admitted 
three suh-genera and seven species; and Lacepede 
has three genera and eight species, including his 
Cachalots, physalus, and pliyseters. Every one who, 
previous to our own days, had attempted to reconcile 
the many contradictory accounts which have been 
given of this extraordinary animal, seems in his turn 
* Cachalot from Cachou , a tooth, in the Basque language. 


TITE SPERMACETI WHALE 



PLATE 8 




























































































































































































I 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 155 

to have been foiled; and it was reserved for Cuvier 
to cut at all events, if not to unravel the knot. He 
remarks, “ the history of this animal is so perplexed, 
so many beings have been confounded with it, and 
the species have been so wantonly multiplied, that, 
to obtain some precision on the subject, I have been 
necessitated to review, chronologically, every thing 
that naturalists have written on the point.” After 
making this review, he concludes with these words: 
“ Will it now then be regarded as great temerity in 
me, after having produced the ideas of so many 
learned men, to maintain that, up to the present 
time, there is no ground to suppose that there is 
more than a single species of Cachalot V 

And as, till the time of Cuvier, there was the 
greatest confusion regarding alleged species, so, till 
a much more recent date, there was an almost un¬ 
accountable paucity of information regarding its 
real habits and history; though, in a national and 
commercial point of view, it is second in interest 
only to the Mysticetus. From the difficulty of ex¬ 
amining these animals, and the few opportunities 
presented to zoologists, there is really very little at 
all satisfactory about them in the annals of Cetology, 
and even the economical notices are but few and 
meagre. We rejoice to say, that this deficiency has 
to a considerable extent been supplied during the past 
year by a gentleman, who, for upwards of two years, 
was engaged in its capture, and who read a paper 
upon it to the Eclectic Society of London in .1835. 
When engaged in the fishery, Mr. Beale, who is a 


156 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


surgeon, and was, we presume, professionally em¬ 
ployed, had no thought of publication, and therefore 
overlooked many circumstances which would other¬ 
wise have engaged his attention. But notwith¬ 
standing this, he has judged wisely, we conceive, in 
complying with the request of his friends to furnish 
such information as he had; and we cannot but 
proffer him our best thanks, and w T araily recommend 
his little work to all who are curious in natural his¬ 
tory. It will appear in the sequel that he supplies 
by far the most copious and satisfactory information 
on the subject. 

We take our description very much from that 
afforded by Cuvier (Oss. Foss. v. 339). Externally, 
according to the most authentic accounts, it is one 
of the largest Cetacea, attaining the length of seventy 
and eighty feet; its head is very large in all dimen¬ 
sions, and its length does not appear to have been 
much exaggerated w T hen stated to be about a third 
of the wdiole body; the snout is very obtuse, and 
apparently truncated ; the lower jaw, very narrow, 
is received between the upper lips as in a furrow, the 
teeth entering, w T hen the mouth is shut, into cavities 
on the edge of the palate. The blow-hole, twelve 
inches long, in form of an /, is on the anterior ex¬ 
tremity of the head, in the centre of a round protu¬ 
berance, which is formed of thick fibres, which act as 
a sphincter. The pectorals are small and obtuse; there 
is a small dorsal protuberance only, far down the 
back; and sometimes two or three smaller ones ; 
the tail is very large. The colour, above, is a blackish 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 157 

and somewhat greenish-grey; below it is whitish, as 
also round the eyes. The immense cavity at the 
upper part of the head, covered only by a tendinous 
but very resisting integument, is divided interiorly 
into compartments, also tendinous, which commu¬ 
nicate with one another, and into cells filled with 
oil, which is fluid when the animal is alive, and 
which, when it is dead, takes the concrete form with 
which we are familiar, under the name of spermaceti; 
and which, very absurdly, was long regarded as the 
brain, which occupies a very small space in the interior 
of the cranium. The spermaceti is also distributed 
along the back, and in many other parts of the 
body, in a way which is not yet clearly explained. 
The ambergris , again, is found in the intestinal 
canal, hut it has not yet been ascertained in what 
precise part and under what exact circumstances. 
The skin is so dense and insensible in its nature, that 
usually large shells attach themselves to it as to a 
rock, and there fix their permanent abode : these 
shells, which are very numerous, are sometimes mis¬ 
taken for white patches of the skin. The eyes are 
alleged to he remarkably small, unequal, and the left 
often useless. This want of symmetry about the eye 
and other parts of the face seems a curious circum¬ 
stance, which, however, is not confined to this species. 
The blowing-tubes are likewise very unequal, that on 
the right side not being one-fourth so large as that 
on the left. This great size of the left nostril points 
out the direction of the blowing apparatus, and ex¬ 
plains the circumstance first mentioned, we believe, 


158 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


by Schewediawer in the Phil. Tram. 1783, that 
the Cachalots often project the column towards the 
left side. 

When we turn from the classical description of 
Cuvier to the more popular statement of Beale, we 
find that, though there is a general agreement, yet 
there are also several discrepancies; as there is like¬ 
wise between his pictorial representation (see PI. ix.) 
and those which had been previously published; 
of which we consider our Plate vm., taken from 
Mr. Robertson’s in the Philosoph. Trans, as the most 
authentic and the best. Whether these discrepancies 
arise from differences of species, time alone can show. 
He perfectly agrees as to the size, making it eighty 
feet, and adds, that its largest circumference seldom 
exceeds thirty or thirty-five feet. The colour over 
the greater part of the surface is very dark; in parts 
quite black, on the sides it assumes a lighter tint, 
and on the breast is silvery grey. Sometimes it is 
piebald. “ Old bulls,” as the old grown whales are 
called by the fishers, have generally a portion of 
grey on their nose, and they are then said to be 
grey-headed. The blubber in a large whale, on the 
breast, is about fourteen inches thick, and on most 
other parts of the body it measures from eight to 
eleven inches. This covering the southern whalers 
call the blanket; it is of a light-yellow colour, and 
when melted down yields the sperm oil. Mr. Beale 
does not corroborate, or rather, by saying nothing 
about it, contradicts the statement regarding the 
want of symmetry in the eyes and the blow-holes. 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


159 


The opening to the ear, he states, is of sufficient 
size to admit a small quill. The throat is capacious 
enough to give passage to the body of a man, in this 
respect presenting a strong contrast to the contracted 
gullet of the Greenland whale. According to Mr. 
Beale, the peculiarity of the sperm whale, which 
strikes every beholder, is the unwieldy bulk of the 
head : but this, instead of being an impediment, 
is conducive to its lightness and agility, for the 
greatest part of it containing oil, which is lighter 
than water, gives the head a tendency to rise so 
far above the surface as to elevate the blow-hole for 
the purpose of respiration ; and should the animal 
wish to increase its speed to the utmost, the narrow 
lower part of the head, which bears some resem¬ 
blance to the cut-water of a ship, is the only part 
exposed to the pressure of the water in front, thus 
enabling it to pass with the greatest velocity and 
ease through the ocean. 

One of the characteristics we have mentioned 
as generally stated, is, that the teeth are confined to 
the lower jaw; and this as a popular character is 
a very good one. Literally speaking, however, it is 
not accmately true. Teeth in the upper jaw have 
been seen and described by Fabricius, and they 
are also mentioned by the Abbe Lecoz and by An¬ 
derson : they are, however, wholly rudimentary, are 
hidden under the jaws, and can scarcely therefore be 
used by the animal. 

Mr. Beale’s observations on the swimming of this 
whale are furious: he states that when undisturbed 


ICO 


TEE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


it passes tranquilly along just below the surface of 
the water, at the rate of about three or four miles 
an hour, its progress being effected by a gentle oblique 
motion of the tail from side to side : when proceed¬ 
ing at its usual rate, the body lies horizontally, the 
water by its progress being somewhat disturbed, is 
known by the whalers under the name of “ white 
waterand, from its greater or less appearance, an 
experienced eye can, from the distance of several 
miles, judge of the rate at which the whale is ad¬ 
vancing : in this mode of swimming it is able to 
obtain a velocity of about seven miles an hour. 
When it swims at a more rapid rate, the action of the 
tail is altered ; the water is struck directly upwards 
and doAvnwards, and each time the blow is made with 
the inferior surface, the head sinks down eight or 
ten feet, and when the blow is reversed, it rises out 
of the water, presenting to it only the sharp cut- 
Avater portion. The blow with the upper surface 
appears to be by far the most powerful, and as, at 
the same time, the resistance of the broad part of 
the head is removed, tins appears to be the principal 
means of rapid progression. This mode of SAvim- 
ming (see Plate ex.) is what is called going head 
out; and in this way the whale can attain a speed 
of ten or twelve miles an hour, which is probably 
its greatest velocity. 

According to Beale, the food of the Sperm Whale, 
when in deep seas, which he regards its usual resort, 
is the sepia octapus , a molluscous animal, called 
“ squid” by the sailors; and Avhen near shore, a fish 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE 

Beale 



PLATE 















































































. 




• i 


\ 




































’ 












- 










; & ■ >: 'r. '■ 


’ * _ 














' - , 


















. 




















•*' 
















THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


161 


of the size of a moderate salmon, which abounds in 
the bays and creeks. He remarks, it is difficult to 
conceive how so large an animal can ever catch a 
sufficient quantity of such animals if it has to pursue 
them individually, and the more so, as neither of 
those specified are known to exist in shoals or 
closely congregated. Tire theory of the sailors on 
the point is, that when one of these Cetas is inclined 
to feed, it descends a certain depth, and there re¬ 
mains as quiet as possible, opening its enormous 
mouth, and allowing the lower jaw to hang down at 
a right angle with the body. The internal parts of 
the mouth, and the teeth, being of a white glistening 
colour, are supposed to attract its prey, and when a 
sufficiency is within the mouth, the jaw is closed and 
the morsel is seized. Mr. Beale adopts this opinion, 
and thinks it confirmed by two singular facts which 
he adduces; first, that of a whale he met with, which 
must have been long blind, and was yet found in 
excellent condition when captured ; and, secondly, 
the frequent occurrence of great deformity of the 
lower jaw, so as to make the capture of small 
bodies impossible, and yet animals so circumstanced 
are as rich in oil as healthy ones. The latter de¬ 
formities, we may remark in passing, arise from the 
severe contests which the animals maintain against 
each other, in which the jaws are closely locked, 
and the force mutually exerted is enormous. 

We have entered into these details as they em¬ 
body the opinion of observers, which we would treat 
with respect ; and also, because so far as the squid 

VOL. vi. o 


THE SPERMACETI "WHALE. 


and fish are concerned, it is a fact that they hare 
often been found in the stomach after death, and so 
constitute the occasional food of this whale. We 
would, however, venture to suggest to those who 
may have opportunities of observing, whether this 
whale may not also frequently resort to the me¬ 
dusae and minute fish, which, in so remarkable a 
manner, supply food to some of the smaller, as 
well as to the other genera of the gigantic whales. 
That there is an abundant supply of this provender, 
both in the Antarctic Ocean and the more smiling 
latitudes of the Southern Seas, can easily he proved 
by a reference to Lesson’s statements as on p. 149, 
and also by other observations. Captain Colnett 
on one occasion remarks, “ The set of the currents 
on the coast of Chili may at all times be disco¬ 
vered, by noticing the direction of large beds of 
small blubber with which the coast abounds, and 
from which the water derives a colour like that 
of blood: I have often been engaged for a whole 
day in passing through various sets of themand 
again, when approaching the southern point of 
America; “ during this forenoon we passed several 
fields of spawn, which caused the water to bear the 
appearance of barley covering the surface of a bank.” 
(Voyage\ &c. p. 170 and 10.) Orbigny also re¬ 
marks, that there are immense tracts off the coast of 
Brazil filled with small creatures, so numerous as to 
impart a red colour to the sea; large portions are 
thus highly coloured, and receive from the whalers 
the name of Banc die Bresil. This bank extends 


TIIE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


163 


along a great part of the coast of Brazil, keeping at 
nearly the same distance. He also states, that 
another similar bank occurs near Cape Horn in 
57° south latitude. Statements of this sort could 
easily be multiplied; and hence we cannot but 
suppose that this kind of food which is ascertained 
to afford such rich nourishment to the other great 
Cetacea, may very possibly be appropriated by the 
. Sperm Whale to the same purpose. 

The Sperm Whale is remarkably distinguished 
from its congeners by its blowing, so that it may 
be recognized at a great distance even by the most 
inexperienced whaler. When at the surface for 
the purpose of respiration, it usually remains still; 
but occasionally makes a gentle progress during the 
whole process. If the water be smooth, the first part 
observed is the hump, projecting two or three feet 
above the surface: at very regular intervals of time 
the snout emerges, at the distance of forty or fifty 
feet; from the extremity of the snout the jet is 
thrown up, and when seen from a distance, appears 
thick, low, and bushy, and of a white colour; it is 
formed, says Mr. Beale, by the air expired forcibly 
through the spiracle, acquiring its white colour from 
minute particles of water, previously lodged in the' 
external fissure: it is projected at an angle of 45^ 
in a slow and continuous manner, for about three 
seconds, and may be discovered at the distance of 
four or five miles. 

The regularity with which the actions connected 
with breathing are performed is very remarkable. 


164 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


The length of time this whale remains at the sur¬ 
face, the number of spoutings made on one occasion, 
the intervals between them, and the time it remains 
beneath, are all, when the animal remains undis¬ 
turbed, as regular in succession and duration as it is 
possible to imagine. With different individuals the 
time varies, but in each the several acts are minutely 
regular; and this is of considerable use to the fisher, 
for when the periods of any particular whale are 
once noticed, he knows to a moment when to ex¬ 
pect it again at the surface, and how long it will 
remain there. Immediately after each spout, the 
nose sinks under water, scarcely a second interven¬ 
ing for the act of inspiring, which must consequently 
he done very quickly. There is no sound caused 
by the inspiration, and very little by the expira¬ 
tion. 

In a “ large bull,” so an old male is called, the 
time from the termination of one spouting to that 
of another is ten seconds; during six of these the 
snout is under water, three are occupied by the 
expiration, and one by the inspiration ; and at each 
breathing time, the whale makes from sixty to 
seventy respirations, and therefore remains ten or 
eleven minutes at the surface. When this is ended, 
or, as the sailors say, it has had “ its spoutings out,” 
the head sinks slowly, the posterior part of the body 
appears above water, the tail is lifted high into the 
air, and the animal having thus assumed a straight 
position, descends perpendicularly to an unknown 
depth: this act is performed with great regularity 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


165 


and slowness. It continues hidden under w T ater 
for an hour and ten minutes; some will remain 
only for an hour, and others for an hour and twenty 
minutes, hut these are exceptions. The females 
remain on the surface for a shorter time, and as 
might be expected, ascend more frequently to re¬ 
spire : they come up about every twenty minutes. 
The times of the young whales seem regulated by 
their respective ages and sizes. 

When disturbed or alarmed, this regularity in the 
breathing is no longer observed; for the instant a 
“ bull” is disturbed, as by the approach of a boat, 
he immediately plunges under the wave, though he 
may not have been on the surface half his time ; he 
will then soon rise again, not far distant, and will 
complete his time. In this case, generally, also he 
sinks without previously assuming the perpendicular 
position, and with remarkable rapidity, leaving a 
sort of vortex in the place he lately occupied. When 
urging his rapid course through the ocean, in that 
mode which is called going “ head out,” he spouts 
every time the head is raised above the wave, and, 
under these circumstances of violent exertion, as 
might be expected, the respiration is much more 
hurried than usual. 

This leviathan is, like the mysticetus, remark¬ 
ably timid, and is readily alarmed by the approach 
of any unlooked for object. When frightened, 
the w'hale is said by sailors to be u gallied,” pro¬ 
bably galled; and in this state it performs many 
actions in a manner very different from the usual 


166 


TIIE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


mode. One of these is wliat is called “ sweeping,” 
which consists in moving the tail slowly from side 
to side on the surface of the water, as if feeling 
for any object that may he near. This whale has 
also an extraordinary fashion of rolling over and 
over on the surface, and especially when harpooned; 
and in this case it will sometimes coil an amazing 
length of line around it. But one of its most sur¬ 
prising feats, as has been mentioned of the genera 
already described, is leaping completely out of the 
water, or “breaching,” as it is called. The mode 
in which this appears to he done, is by its descend¬ 
ing to a certain depth, and then making several 
powerful and rapid strokes with its tail, thus im¬ 
parting great velocity to the body before it reaches 
the surface, when it darts completely out of the 
water. The body forms, when just emerged and 
at its greatest elevation, an angle of 45°, the tail 
being parallel with the surface; in falling, the 
body rolls over on the side : it seldom breaches 
more than twice or thrice at a time, and in quick 
succession. This performance may be seen in a 
clear day at a distance of six miles from the mast¬ 
head. As has also been previously stated regarding 
the mysticetus, “ lob tailing” is another frequent 
and favourite amusement with this genus. 

The Sperm Whale is a gregarious animal, and the 
herds are of two kinds, the one consisting of females, 
and the other of young and not fully grown males; 
the latter are again generally subdivided into groups 
according to their ages. These herds are called 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 187 

“ schools,” and occasionally consist of two, four, or 
even six hundred. With each herd of females seve¬ 
ral large hulls are always to be found, the lords of 
the herd, or, as they are called, the “ schoolmasters.” 
These males are extremely jealous of intruders, and 
fight fiercely to maintain their rights. 

The full grown male whales, or “ large whales,” 
almost always go alone in search of food ; and when 
they are seen in company, they are supposed to be 
making passages from one feeding ground to another. 
The “ large whale” is generally very incautious, and, 
if alone, is attacked without difficulty, and generally 
easily killed ; as he frequently, after receiving the 
first plunge of the harpoon, appears hardly to feel 
it, but continues lying like a log of wood before he 
makes any attempt to escape. Large whales are 
sometimes, however, remarkably cunning and full 
of courage, when they will commit dreadful havock 
'with their tail and jaws. 

According to Beale, the female breeds at all sea¬ 
sons, and the time of her gestation is “ not very 
long.” He also states, that she is much smaller 
than the male, in the proportion nearly of one to 
four or five. This appears a novel, and we pre¬ 
sume to think, a somewhat doubtful assertion. They 
are not only, like other genera, greatly attached to 
their young, but are likewise remarkable for then- 
strong feeling of sociability and attachment to one 
another ; and this is carried to such an extent, that 
if one female of the herd be wounded, her faith- 
ful companions will remain round her till the last 


168 


THE SPERMACETI WHALE. 


moment, or till they are wounded themselves. This 
act is called by the whalers “ heaving toand whole 
schools have been destroyed by dexterous manage¬ 
ment, when several ships have been in company. 
This attachment is remarkably strong in cubs, and 
hence they remain about the ship long after their 
parent is destroyed. Captain Colnett remarked, that 
if one of a herd be harpooned, more mischief was 
done by the loose fish, than by those to which the 
boats were fast. 

The young males or “ young bulls” generally also 
go in schools; but differ remarkably from the fe¬ 
males in disposition, inasmuch as they make an im¬ 
mediate and rapid retreat when one of their num¬ 
ber is struck, and this unfortunate individual is left 
to take the best care of himself he can. They are 
also very cunning and cautious, keeping at all times a 
good look-out against danger. The whaler, accord¬ 
ingly, must be extremely careful in approaching them, 
so as, if possible, not to be seen or heard; for they have 
a mode of Communicating with one another through 
a whole school in an incredible short space of time. 
This remark is true of all Sperm Whales, which thus 
become apprized of the approach of danger, though 
at the distance of four, five, or even seven miles. 
(See p. 57-) Young bulls are consequently much 
more troublesome to attack, and more difficult and 
dangerous to kill than when full grown. When 
three quarters or a half grown, they separate from 
each other, and go singly in search of their food. 

According to Beale, this species is never or veiy 


SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 


169 


rarely seen in soundings; it inhabits the unfathom¬ 
able ocean : far away from land, it seeks its prey, 
produces its young, and follows all its natural incli¬ 
nations. At times it may approach the shore, 
but only nothin a certain distance, and where the 
water is still unfathomable. This account is differ¬ 
ent from any we have before seen, and we will 
therefore supply, along with it, the statement of 
another professional gentleman, an eminent natu¬ 
ralist, who spent many a year in its pursuit, with his 
attention peculiarly directed to it. Lesson states 
that the individuals of this species are true cosmo¬ 
polites, and throughout the year may be found in 
every quarter of the globe. Yet, according to him, 
there are certain and not very long seasons, when 
they congregate together in great herds towards the 
coasts, in the quiet bays; and a union once formed, 
the different pairs immediately separate from the 
band, and direct themselves at random throughout 
the boundless ocean. He adds, could the times 
and places at which these re-unions take place be 
ascertained, they would much diminish the labours 
of the whaler. 


The method of conducting the southern fishery 
differs in several particulars from that followed in 
the north, and these differences we shall nov r en¬ 
deavour to point out. Some of the ships are fitted 
out solely for fishing the Sperm Whale, whilst 
others keep a sharp look-out for the mysticetus 
vol. vi. p 



SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 


170 

also; and others, it would appear, in lack of these, 
hesitate not to attack almost any kind of whale 
that comes -within their reach. 

When a whale appears in view, the signal is given,, 
and the boats hanging at the ship’s side, and com¬ 
pletely ready for the attack, are instantly lowered. 
These boats are supplied with a mast and sail, 
and plenty fresh water, with headsman, steersman, 
and rowers; with harpoons, two of which are at¬ 
tached to the lines, with lances and a buoy to which 
a signal is attached, &c. The boats steer so as to 
approach the animal from behind, and if there be 
more than one in view, each boat fastens to a dis¬ 
tinct fish, and each crew kill their own. Sometimes 
the first stroke of the harpoon is mortal, but gene¬ 
rally it is otherwise, and the harpooner on the 
instant, rapid like lightning, darts his second har¬ 
poon. On this the animal, irritated by the pain, 
plunges into the deep; and this movement, which 
the fishers call “ sounding,” requires the greatest 
attention lest the line be entangled. When the line 
is exhausted, the buoy with its flag is attached to 
the extremity, and thrown into the sea. This buoy, 
carried along with the animal, is the compass which 
guides the boats till they again seize the end of 
the line when their victim is enfeebled, and its speed 
diminished by the loss of blood. So soon as its 
energy is relaxed, the line is carried round the bol¬ 
lard, and all the resistance is offered that can safely 
be employed. When the animal requires again to 
come to the surface, the boat pulls upon the line,. 


SPERMACETI WHALE 

Beale 



PLATE 10 





















SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 171 

approaches the fast fish as rapidly as possible, and 
renews the contest. On thrusting or darting his 
lance, the headsman calls out “ Stern-all,” when the 
boat immediately recedes. Upon feeling the lance, 
the whale generally plunges, and throws itself in all 
directions, lashing the water with its tail, and threat¬ 
ening destruction with its formidable jaw. The 
dying struggles are sometimes tremendous, and the 
boats at this time generally keep aloof, as otherwise 
they might he dashed to pieces. (See Plate x.) 

The larger whales, such as yield eighty or more 
barrels of oil, not being nearly so active, are gene¬ 
rally, by expert whalers, killed easily, and with 
less danger than the smaller ones. These enor¬ 
mous creatures, however, are sometimes known to 
turn upon their persecutors with unbounded fury, 
destroying every thing that meets them in their 

course. Mr. Beale was witness of an occurrence 

\ 

of this sort, off the coast of Japan, in July 1832. 
Captain William Swain of the Sarah and Eliza¬ 
beth of London had, with two other boats, been 
engaged in chasing a large whale nearly the whole 
of the day. At four p. m. the captain was con¬ 
siderably a-head of the other boats, and had suc¬ 
ceeded in harpooning it; and, being a dexterous 
whaler, he succeeded in lancing the animal twice 
before it recovered from the blow; these wounds 
having penetrated the chest, caused the abundant 
ejection of blood through the spiracle : it however 
suddenly descended to the depth of about forty fa¬ 
thoms, and as suddenly rose, striking the boat with 


DANGERS OP 


172 

excessive force, which threw it into the air in frag¬ 
ments, with the men and every thing it contained. 
The men, though much bruised, managed to support 
themselves with oars, &c. for about three quarters 
of an horn-, when they were relieved by the arrival 
of another of the boats. All this time the whale con¬ 
tinued near them, and several sharks, attracted by 
the blood. The whale was finally secured. 

Numberless stories are told of fighting whales, one 
or two of which we shall mention. In the year 1804, 
the ship Adonis, being in company with several 
others, struck a large whale olf the coast of New 
Zealand, which “ stove” and destroyed nine boats 
before breakfast, and the chase was consequently 
given up. After destroying the boats belonging to 
many ships, this whale was at last captured, and 
many harpoons of various vessels were found in its 
body. This whale was extensively known under 
the designation of “ New Zealand Tom,” and many 
traditions about it are carefully preserved. 

But it is not boats only, for ships even are some¬ 
times destroyed by these powerful creatures. It is 
a well authenticated fact, that the American-ship, 
the Essex, was destroyed in the South Pacific 
Ocean by an enormous Sperm Whale. When the 
greater part of the crew were absent in the boats 
killing whales, the few people remaining on board 
saw an enormous whale come up close to the ship, 
and when very near, it appeared to sink down for 
the purpose of avoiding the vessel; and in doing so, 
struck its body against some part of the keel, which 


SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 173 

was broken off by the force of tlie blow and floated 
to the surface. The whale was then observed to 
rise a short distance from the ship, and to come 
with apparently great fury towards it, striking one 
of the bows with its head with amazing force, and 
so completely staved it in. The ship of course im¬ 
mediately filled, and fell over on her side; in which 
dreadful position the poor fellows in the boats saw 
their only home, and many hundred miles distant 
from the nearest land! On returning to the wreck, 
they found the few who had been left on board, 
hastily congregating in the remaining boat, in which 
they had scarcely taken refuge when the vessel cap¬ 
sized. With much difficulty they obtained a scanty 
supply of provisions from the wreck, their only sup¬ 
port for the long and dreary passage before them to 
the coast of Peru, whither they endeavoured to 
make their way. Three only of the whole crew 
survived; the remainder having perished under 
unheard of sufferings and privations, over which we 
willingly draw a veil. These three were found in 
a state of stupefaction, allowing their boat to drift 
along where the winds and waves listed. One of 
the survivors was the master: by kind and careful 
attention they were eventually rescued from the 
jaws of death. 

The flensing or “ cutting in” process is somewhat 
peculiar. On being attached to the side of the ves¬ 
sel, a frame* work is thrown over the fish, and a strap 
of blubber is cut in a spiral direction, which being 
raised by certain purchases, turns the fish round as 


SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 


on an axis till nearly the whole blubber is stript off. 
To show how this process is conducted, and as ex¬ 
hibiting a faithful outline, taken by measurement, of 
a young individual of this genus, we refer to the 
accompanying cut copied from a sketch of Colnett’s. 



The tackles are hooked at d ; a , a, ci, are spiral stripes sue- 
cessively removed ; when removed as far as E, the carcase 
will no longer “ cant” in the tackles, and it is therefore cut 
through at the line E, E, and also at G, G, the tail being of no 
value. The compartment A shews the part of the head which 
contains the liquid oil. Being suspended by the tackles, the 
front part is cut off at b, b, and the oil baled out with 
buckets. When the whale is small, the head is divided at 
the line c', c', previous to its being hoisted on deck ; the space 
between a', a', and c ', c', also contains much oil. B is the 
blow-hole ; H, the ear. 

The head matter when congealed is put into casks 
in its crude state, and refined at the conclusion 
of the voyage. The blubber, however, is reduced 
into oil immediately in “ try-works/' with which 
every ship is provided for the purpose. The cop¬ 
pers in the try-works are two in number, and are 
placed near the fore hatchway; they are surrounded 
with a casing of brick-work, which forms a cistern, 
the water in which is changed every two hours so as 
to defend the deck from injury. The fuel is the 
blubber fritters, which produce a fierce fire. A large 




SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 


175 

fish produces about three tons of oil, a small one 
from one to two. A hundred whales sometimes go 
to form the cargo of a ship, the produce of which, in 
boiled sperm oil, may be from one hundred and fifty 
to two hundred tons, besides head matter. 


The South Sea fishery was not regularly estab¬ 
lished as a branch of British trade till towards the 
close of the last century. The vessels are usually 
between three and four hundred tons burden; and 
the voyage occupies frequently three and even four 
years; but when all kinds of whales are attacked, 
it may be stated as lasting from twenty months to 
two years. In the course of the voyage they occa¬ 
sionally put into harbours to refit and refresh the 
crew. The officers and crew are stimulated to 
exertion by certain shares of the cargo obtained. 
The captain receives perhaps a twelfth; the har- 
pooner a fortieth, &c. Several years ago, the com¬ 
plete outfit amounted, besides the vessel, to about 
£.4000, and a cargo of the highest value might 
yield £.25,000 or £.30,000. The success was 
tolerably certain; and the trade has been found 
upon the whole lucrative. In 1791, seventy-five 
vessels were engaged; but the number has not since 
been so great. In 1830, only thirty-one ships were 
sent out, of the burden of eleven thousand tons, all 
from the port of London, carrying nine hundred and 
thirty-seven men. The relative values of the pro¬ 
ducts of the different fisheries may be seen from the 



SOUTH SEA FISHERY - . 


176 

market quotations of November 1835. Sperm oil, 
<£.75 per ton. Greenland, £.40. South Sea oil, 
£.42. Pale seal, £ 43. Whalebone from northern 
fishery, £.250 per ton. Whalebone from southern 
fishery, £.145. 

The Americans for a long time have prosecuted 
this trade with great vigour, and more success per¬ 
haps than any other people. They commenced it in 
1690, and for about fifty years found an abundant 
supply of fish on their own shores; but the whales 
having abandoned these resorts, the American navi¬ 
gators entered with extraordinary ardour into the 
fisheries carried on in the northern and southern 
oceans. Mr. Burke, in his famous speech on Ame¬ 
rican affairs in 1774, adverted to this wonderful dis¬ 
play of daring enterprise as follows:—“ While we 
are carrying on the whale fishery under the Arctic 
circle, we hear that they have pierced into the op¬ 
posite region of Polar cold; that they are at the 
antipodes, and engaged under the frozen serpent of 
the south. Falkland island, which seems too re¬ 
mote and too romantic an object for the grasp of 
national ambition, is but a stage and resting-place 
for their victorious industry. Nor is the equatorial 
heat more discouraging to them than the accumu¬ 
lated winter of both poles. We learn, that when 
some of them draw the line or strike the harpoon 
on the coast 'of Africa, others run the longitude and 
pursue their gigantic game along the coast of Brazil. 
No sea but what is vexed with their fisheries. No 
climate that is not witness of their toil. Neither 


SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 


177 

tlie perseverance of Holland, nor the dexterous and 
firm sagacity of English enterprise, ever carried this 
most perilous mode of hardy industry to the extent 
to which it has been pursued by this recent people ; 
a people who are still in the gristle, and not har¬ 
dened into manhood.” 

Within the last few years the colony of New 
South Wales has been busily employed in tills 
branch of commerce, and with great benefit to those 
engaged in it. The colonists axe situated so much 
nearer the fishing grounds, that neither the time 
nor the expense of outfit can be compared with 
that of the ships equipped from Britain. Of sperm 
oil there was exported in .1835, two thousand nine 
hundred and eighty-nine tons, valued at £.151,738 ; 
and of black oil, fourteen hundred and seventy-seven 
tons, valued at £.19,357- 

We annex, from Mr. Beale’s work, a very con¬ 
densed enumeration of the various stations in which 
this whale has been seen in greatest number :—New 
Guinea, New Iceland, New Britain, King’s Mill 
Group, Byron’s Island, equinoctial line from longi¬ 
tude 168° to 175° east; Ellis Group ; off the east 
coast of New Holland; off New Zealand and the 
Navigators’ Islands, coast of California, Chili, and 
Peru; the Gallapagos; the Molluccas; Straits of 
Timor; the Mozambique Channel; off Japan and 
the China seas ; Loochar Islands, &c. &c. 

These localities, it will be observed, are all in the 
southern hemisphere ; but it must not thence be 
inferred that Sperm Whales are confined to its seas. 

VOL. VI. Q, 


SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 


178 

We have seen that at one time they frequented the 
shores of North America, and they are also found 
in the Northern Pacific. Though not observed in 
great troops, yet they are said to he sometimes 
taken in Orkney and Shetland (Statistical Account , 
v. 190), and they are occasionally stranded on the 
British coasts. Thus Mr. Pennant states that a 
large specimen was stranded on the coast of Norfolk, 
which is particularly commemorated by Sir Thomas 
Brown (Zoology , ii. 500); one came ashore, fifty- 
two feet long, in 1689, at Limekilns in the Forth, 
and is described by Sibbald; two others, each 
measuring fifty-four feet, were in 1769 cast ashore 
near the Tillage of Cramond in the same Frith 
(Statistical Account , i. 220); and one, sixty-three 
feet long, was in 1756 stranded on the west of 
Boss -shire : one, fifty-eight feet long, was stranded 
on the Yorkshire coast, as noticed by Mr. Anderson 
in the Trans. of the Cambridge Phil. Soc. for 1827; 
seventeen were cast ashore in the Elbe in 1723, 
half of which were males; and thirty-one, in 1784, 
were stranded at one time in the Bay of Audieme 
in Lower Brittany, nearly all of which were females. 
(Fr. Cuviers Hist. p. 268. 271.) It would thus 
however appear they are, alive or dead, but rare in 
this part of the world. 

On its introduction into commerce, spermaceti, to 
which, when refined, the French have applied the 
name of cetine , was chiefly employed in medicine, 
in which its use is still continued. It has also been 
freely used in the cosmetic art. Its largest and most 


SOUTH SEA FISHERY. 


179 

valuable application, however, has long been in the 
manufacture of candles, in which it maintains a 
considerable rivalry with wax, as cheaper and not 
less elegant and agreeable. 

Ambergris , according to its quantity, is a pecu¬ 
liarly valuable product of the Sperm Whale ; often, 
however, we might say generally, it is not at all 
found in them. Sometimes it sells in London not 
much under £.1 an ounce, but frequently two or 
three voyages are accomplished, and successfully too, 
without any ambergis being obtained. It is seldom 
or ever found in the young fish ; but only in those 
of full size, or rather of great age. It is generally 
considered the result of some diseased process in the 
intestinal canal, to which the individual has been 
subjected. The quantity obtained, therefore, is very 
various. The mate of the Ocean reported to Messrs. 
Quoy and Gaimard, as an extraordinary occurrence, 
that, on one occasion, he extracted fifty pounds from 
a single animal. We remember seeing it stated on 
good authority, that a single piece of precisely the 
same weight was found by some sailors on the coast 
of the Bermudas, who, calculating that they had 
made their fortune, lost no time in escaping to 
England. Still larger masses sometimes, though 
rarely, have been found; the largest we have seen 
mentioned weighed two hundred pounds. (Fr . 
Cuviers Hist. 303.) Ambergris is found in con¬ 
siderable quantity on the coasts of the Indian Archi¬ 
pelago. It is highly esteemed by the Malays, as 
by most orientalists; some of whom reserve it ex- 


180 PRODUCTS OF THE SPERM WHALE. 

clusively for the use of the rajahs. The coasts of 
Formosa, of the Molluccas, of Brazil, the Antilles, 
and Madagascar are also famous for it. It occurs 
also, hut in much smaller quantities, in the Baltic 
and other European shores. Its use is almost wholly 
confined to the perfumer. 

Among many of the South Sea islanders a most 
extraordinary value is attached to the teeth of this 
animal. They offer them as gifts to their idols, or 
adorn with them their queens. In their estimation, 
they form the ne plus ultra of what is valuable; and 
thus they become the most precious subjects of barter, 
by which most of the whale captains purchase fresh 
provisions for their crews, or w r hat else of value can 
he obtained on the islands. It has been mentioned 
that the inhabitants of the Marquisas consider a 
good one equal to great riches; and the same is the 
estimate made by the inhabitants of Fidjis, Ro- 
touma, and by many others of this singular and 
simple race. 


181 


THE HETERODONS. 

Leaving the large headed whales, we come now to 
the second subdivision, which has been proposed by 
Blainville, and adopted by Lesson and other systema- 
tists. Besides having the head of the ordinary pro¬ 
portion which, with other characters, distinguishes 
it from the first subdivision, it is distinguished from 
the third and last chiefly by the teeth. Whilst 
this third is almost uniformly supplied with a great 
number of teeth in both jaws, amounting sometimes 
to hundreds, this second subdivision has generally a 
very small number indeed, which are moreover very 
heterogeneous, confined sometimes to the one jaw, 
and sometimes, in other genera, to the other. Some¬ 
times, as in the narwhal, they are not within the 
mouth at all; and several genera are believed to be 
even still more destitute of teeth. From this great 
paucity, and also from their variety, Blainville has 
denominated this subdivision heterodon (from crsgos 
and obits). It will be perceived that the character 
is not a very striking, or perhaps even a very natural 
and positive one : but, as we presume not to intro¬ 
duce a new classification ourselves, we take it as we 
find it, and follow it as far as it goes, because we 
regard it useful. It includes the Narwhal or Sea 
Unicom, the Diodons or two-teethed whales, the 
Hyperoodon of Cuvier, the Aodon or toothless whale, 
and the Ziphius , which includes some of the most 
important fossiles which have been discovered. 


182 


Fourth Genus.— NARWHALUS. 

Distinguishing Characters .—This genus has no teeth, properly 
so called, but only two tusks, long and pointed, usually 
called horns, springing from the intermaxillary hones, and 
directed forwards in the axis of the body ; it has no dorsal 
fin. 


THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNICORN. 

PLATE XI. 

N. Microchephalus, Bon. Lacepede , Desm. — Monodon Mono- 
ceros, Lin.) Fab.; popularly known as The Sea Unicom. 

This long established genus had been very much the 
creation of fancy; and as, from the peculiarity of its 
singular horn, it excited much interest, so the errors 
connected with it have been very widely spread. 
Both Lacepede and Desmaret have three species; 
the first of which, the large headed, was represented 
as a great oval animal sixty feet long, with a mur¬ 
derous horn of sixteen feet in length, with which, in 
troops, it waged deadly warfare with the mightiest 
inhabitants of the ocean, and made them an easy 
prey. This species, however, is a mere figment, 
the product of ignorance and exaggeration. The 
third species, Narwkalits Andersonii , does not rest 
on any more solid foundation, so that the genus 
really comprehends only one species. 


THE NARWHAL OR SEA UNICORN 

F. Cuvier 



PLATE H 





















































































■ 


















THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNICORN. 183 

A considerable number of notices have now been 
collected of tbis curious animal, from which a toler¬ 
ably accurate account may be given of its appearance 
and habits; one of the most accurate of these, with 
an excellent drawing, was published by Dr. Fleming 
in 1808, in vol. i. of the Trans, of the Wernerian 
Soc. The length of the Narwhal is now usually stated, 
in our more popular works, to be about fifteen or 
sixteen feet, which is to be understood exclusive of 
the tusk; so that with this striking appendage, it 
reaches to from twenty to twenty-six feet. The 
animal which was stranded at Boston in Lincoln¬ 
shire, and of which a drawing was sent by Sir 
J. Banks to Lacepede, and from which he took the 
characters of his Microcephalus, was stated to be 
twenty-five feet long. This perfectly agrees with 
Mr. Sowerby’s account of the same specimen, which 
was published one year after the Count’s. Sir J. 
Banks, in a letter to Dr. Fleming, states, that this 
animal, when found, had buried the whole of its 
body in the mud of which the beach was com¬ 
posed, and seemed safely and securely waiting the 
return of the tide (Brit. Mis. i. 17). Mr. Sowerby 
moreover reports, that this individual, which was ex¬ 
hibited both in London and Cambridge, was wholly 
covered with a black and homy substance, like 
some kinds of tortoise-shell, composed of laminm 
an inch or more in thickness. Tulpius also states 
the size of another, supposed to have been caught 
near the Island of May, to have been twenty-two 
feet. The head comprehends about one-seventh 


184 THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNIOORN. 

part of the whole length; and behind it there is a 
slight depression, which points out the line of sepa¬ 
ration between the head and body. The forehead 
rises suddenly, almost perpendicular from the mouth, 
and then proceeds for a few inches in a horizontal 
direction, when it becomes slightly elevated. On 
this point the spiracle is situated; it is directly over 
the eye, and measures about four inches, by one and 
a half. From the neck, the back swells gradually 
to a few inches behind the pectoral fins, where it 
is thickest. On the upper and lower parts, and on 
each side, slight ridges may be seen, which give 
to the body, especially towards the tail, somewhat 
of a quadrangular form. The pectorals are re¬ 
markably small for the size of the animal, elliptical 
and somewhat curved, with their thickest edge 
forwards. The tail is about twenty inches long and 
about four feet broad. It has no dorsal fin ; but in 
place of it, there is an irregular, sharp, fatty ridge, 
two inches in height, extending between two and 
three feet along the back, nearly mid-way between 
the snout and tail. 

The prevailing colour of the Narwhal is blackish- 
grey on the back, variegated with numerous darker 
spots running into each other, and forming a dusky- 
black surface; with paler and more open spots of 
grey on a white ground at the sides, which spots dis¬ 
appear altogether on the belly. In old animals the 
ground is wholly white or yellowish-white, with 
dark-grey or blackish spots of different degrees of 
intensity; on the belly extremely faint and few, and 


THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNICORN. 185 

in considerable surfaces, none at all are to be seen. 
In sucklings the colour is wholly a bluish-grey or 
slate colour. In one which, was stranded in the 
Elbe in 1736, Anderson states the skin was white 
as snow, and marked with many dark spots to a 
considerable depth; the abdomen was every where 
white and glistening, and soft to the touch like 
velvet. 

The Narwhal has no true teeth in either jaw; 
but in the upper are found the most distinguishing 
characters of the genus, two long straight and 
pointed tusks, like spears, spirally twisted, and im¬ 
planted into the bones of the upper jaw—the inter- 
maxillaries; their direction is fonvards, somewhat 
downwards, parallel to the palate bones. There is 
literally no trace of any other teeth. When very 
young, the germ of the teeth can be discovered on 
each side of the mesial line, the subsequent elonga¬ 
tion of which produces the sharp tusk of the adult. 
Sometimes both germs are developed, and produce 
two horizontal and diverging spears. Among a 
considerable number of instances which might be ad¬ 
duced, we mention only one beautiful exhibition of 
this more perfect developement, which is preserved 
in the museum of Roeding at Hamburgh. In this 
specimen, when they start from the bone, the tusks 
are only two inches apart, but they steadily diverge 
and their points are thirteen inches asunder. The 
left tusk is seven feet five inches, and the light seven 
feet long. It much more frequently happens, how¬ 
ever, that only one of these germs grows; and that 

VOL. IV. R 


186 THE NARWHAX, OR SEA UNICORN. 

the other, somehow strangled, is almost obliterated 
and remains shut up in the bone, like an inert 
osseous nut. From this appearance, which is by 
much most frequently seen, has resulted the many 
names which the Narwhal has received, such as 
Monodon , Monoceros , and Unicom; although the 
early authors, previous to Linnasus, were not igno¬ 
rant that the rudiments of two existed. It is 
curious that the tusk is usually found on the left 
side, and we do not know that any sufficient reason 
has been assigned for this circumstance. At one 
time it was stated that the tusks were peculiar to the 
males; this is now however found to be incorrect, 
and it seems doubtful whether they are not as 
common in the one sex as the other. Fabricius 
account is probably the correct one:— 44 Ceterum 
tam fceminoe , quam mares , dentatce.” This natu¬ 
ralist, alike distinguished for his elegance and ac¬ 
curacy, seems to have anticipated those who would 
put in a claim to originality as to the internal 
structure of the tooth ; we again quote his words, 
14 Radice cavus , quae cavitas , ut medella totum, fere 
dentum transit ” It consists of a very fine compact 
kind of ivory. 

The use of this tusk is somewhat doubtful, and 
many purposes sufficiently absurd have been as¬ 
signed for it. Several hints, however, have been 
thrown out by the ingenuity of Mr. Scorseby, which, 
upon the whole, we regard as satisfactorily explain¬ 
ing its use. Thus, in his 44 Arctic Regions,” he 
remarks, from the extremity of the tusk being 


THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNICORN. 187 

smooth and clean, whilst all the rest is rough and 
dirty, and especially from a broken tusk being 
found rubbed down and rounded, it is not im¬ 
probable it may be used in piercing thin ice, for 
the convenience of respiiing, preventing the necessity 
of retreat into open water.” (491). And again in his 
44 Journal of a Voyage,” &c. we find the following 
interesting statement:— 44 My father sent me the 
contents of the stomach of a Narwhal killed a few 
leagues to the westward of us, which were very 
extraordinary. They consisted of several half-di¬ 
gested fishes, with others of which only the bones 
remained. These were remains of a cuttle fish, 
part of the spine of a flat fish, probably a small 
turbot, and a skate almost entire. The last w r as 
two feet three inches in length, and one foot eight 
inches in breadth. It comprised the bones of the 
head, back, and tail, the side fins, and considerable 
portions of the muscular substance. It appears re¬ 
markable that the Narwhal, an animal without 
teeth, a small mouth, and with stiff bps, should be 
able to catch and swallow so large a fish as a skate, 
the breadth of which is nearly three times as great 
as the width of its own mouth. As the animal in 
which these remains were found had a horn of 
seven feet, I apprehend that this instrument had 
been employed in the capture of the fishes on which 
it had recently fed. It seems probable that the 
skates had been pierced with the horn and killed 
before they were devoured; otherwise it is difficult 
to imagine how the Narwhal could have swallowed 


188 THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNICORN. 

them, or how a fish of any activity would have 
permitted itself to be taken, and sucked down the 
throat of a smooth-mouthed animal, without teeth 
to detain and compress it.” 

The eyes are small; the orbit is oval, the iris 
chestnut colour, the sclerotic white. According to 
Scorseby, there are seven cervical, twelve dorsal, and 
thirty-five lumber and caudal vertebrae, in all fifty- 
four. 

The Narwhal is regarded a migrating animal by 
the Greenlanders; its favourite resorts seem to be 
amongst the ice of the Northern Pole, in the creeks 
and bays of Greenland, Davis Straits, and Iceland. 
In these localities it is occasionally very abundant, 
while, when seen further south, it appears as if it 
had gone astray. Solitary and separated from its 
kind, it may be found wandering near the shores of 
Britain, or of Northern Europe. We believe it is 
scarcely ever found in southern latitudes, and its 
home seems to be between the 70° and 80° of 
north latitude. 

A pleasing account is given of this animal in 
the following quotation from Mr. Scorseby:—“ A 
great many Narwhals were often sporting about us, 
sometimes in bands of fifteen or twenty together: 
in several of them each animal had a long horn; 
they were extremely playful, frequently elevating 
their horns, and crossing them with each other as 
in fencing. In the sporting of these animals they 
frequently emitted a very unusual sound, resembling 
the gurgling of water in the throat, which it probably 


THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNICORN. 189 

was, as it only occurred when they reared their 
horns, with the front part of the head and mouth 
out of the water. Several of them followed the 
ship, and seemed to be attracted by the principle of 
curiosity, at the sight of so unusual a body. The 
water being perfectly transparent, they could be 
seen descending to the keel, and playing about the 
rudder for a considerable time.” 

Narwhals are quick, active, inoffensive animals. 
They swim with considerable velocity. When re¬ 
spiring on the surface, after blowing repeatedly 
with much force, they frequently lie motionless for 
several minutes with their back and heads just 
appearing above water. When harpooned, they 
dive in the same manner, and with almost the 
same velocity as the mysticetus, but not to the 
same extent. They generally descend about two 
hundred fathoms, then return to the surface, and 
are despatched with the lance in a few minutes. 
Near the coast, according to Giesecki, they are always 
seen in flocks, in the severest winter, amidst the 
fissures of the fixed ice, in the bays from 70° 
north latitude to the extremest north. The Green¬ 
landers drive them with their sledges to fissures of 
the ice, where the animals generally come up to 
take air, and there kill them with their harpoons 
and guns. 

By the Greenlanders the Unicom is regarded as 
the precursor of the mysticetus, and as soon as it is 
noticed, they prepare in right earnest for the fishing, 
having learned by experience that wherever the 


190 THE NARWHAL, OR SEA UNICORN. 

Narwhal is, there, or in the immediate neighbour¬ 
hood, will he found the whale. This probably arises 
from their using the same kind of food. 

The blubber, encompassing the whole body from 
two to four inches in thickness, supplies about half a 
ton of oil, which is regarded of very superior quality. 
The Greenlanders regard both the oil and the flesh 
as very delightful nourishment. At a time when 
the origin of the horns of these animals was less 
known, and when they were more rare than in the 
present day, they were considered as invaluable, 
and brought a high price. The physician, and still 
more the charlatan, employed them, and superstition 
converted them to its own use; for it is stated that 
the monks in various convents procured the true 
horn of the unicorn, endowed with unheard of 
powers, and far and near obtained for them the 
credit of curing the most inveterate diseases. The 
ivory is esteemed superior to that of the elephant: 
in the words of Giesecki, it far surpasses it in all its 
qualities ; it possesses extreme density and hardness, 
has a dazzling whiteness, which does not pass into 
yellow, and easily receives a very high polish. It 
is said that the kings of Denmark possess a mag¬ 
nificent throne made of this precious material, 
which is preserved with great care in the Castle of 
Rosenberg; and, at the present day, the horns are 
highly valued as an article of trade. 


191 


Fifth Genus. —DIODONS. 

The general characters may be stated to be, their having two 
teeth only in the lower jaw, none in the upper; forehead 
depressed ; lower jaw much larger than upper, and convex. 


DIODONS, OR TWO-TEETHED WHALES. 

Several species are said to belong to tbis genus; 
different, of course, from Hunter’s, subsequently 
discussed. The first we mention is, according to 
Lesson, tbe 

DIODON DESMARESTI. 

Delphinus Desmaresti, Risso. 

Risso (Hist. Nat. Nice. t. iii. pi. 2. fig. 3.) de¬ 
scribes this cetaceous animal as having a very thick 
body, especially in the middle, diminishing towards 
the extremities, and becoming lank in the abdomen. 
Forehead not prominent, but depressed, terminating 
by a long muzzle; upper jaw short and without 
teeth; lower jaw much larger, convex below, and 
having near its extremity two large conical teeth, 
three inches long and one broad ; the eye small and 
oval, with blue iris; spiracle large, semi-lunar; 
pectorals short, dorsal nearly over the vent; tail 


192 DI0D0NS, OR TWO-TEETHED WHALES. 

large and festooned. The upper portion of the 
head and body of the colour of polished steel, with 
a number of lines and white streaks, occurring 
without regularity; belly white; inside of the 
mouth bluish-black. Length of the specimen fif¬ 
teen feet. According to Risso, this species fre¬ 
quents the depths of the Mediterranean, where it 
is rare: he supplies no information regarding its 
habits. 


We are glad we can present to the reader a 
representation of the second species, according to 
Lesson. It is the 

DIODON SOWERBI. 

PLATE XII. 

Delphinus Sowerbi.— Desmaret, Blainville. 

Our Plate of this beautiful animal was taken 

v 

from an individual cast ashore near Brodie-XIouse, 
Elginshire, and was described by Mr Sowerby in 
his British Miscellany. We have not been able to 
procure -a sight of Risso’s plate of the preceding 
species, but no one can fail to remark a very striking 
resemblance between Risso's description and the ani¬ 
mal now under review; so much so, that notwith¬ 
standing Lessons authority, we are almost tempted 
to think they must be identical. Their habitat can 
scarcely have been the same. 



THE DIODON OF SOWERBY 



PLATE 12. 





























































DIODON OF SOWERBY. 


193 


By looking at our plate, and perusing the descrip¬ 
tion of Sowerby, we learn that the body of this 
beautiful animal is thick, especially in the middle, 
diminishing towards the extremities ; the forehead 
is not prominent hut much depressed, and termi¬ 
nates in a long muzzle. Mr. Sowerby states that 
the lower jaw is blunt, longer than the upper, with 
two short lateral teeth, constituting the distinguish¬ 
ing characteristic of the species; the upper jaw, 
wholly without teeth, is sharp, let into the lower 
one, and has two depressions corresponding to the 
teeth; the eye is very small and oval, the spiracle 
is stated to be lunated, with its horns pointing 
forwards ; the pectorals are small; the dorsal is over 
the vent; the tail large and festooned. The colour 
is black above and nearly white below, and satiny 
all over. Immediately under the cuticle the sides 
were observed to be completely covered with white 
vermicular streaks in every direction, which at a 
little distance appeared like irregular cuts of a small 
sharp instrument. The length was sixteen feet, 
and the circumference eleven at the broadest part. 
The habitat and habits of this species are wholly 
unknown. In fact, this is the only specimen which 
has hitherto been noticed and described. 


VOL. VI. 


s 


194 


d 


Sixth Genus— HYPEROODONTES* 

Lacepede , Cuvier . 

Characters .. —Three enormous maxillary crests rise over the 
cranium and are separated by deep furrows ; these occasion 
the remarkably rounded and prominent forehead, with the 
short and strong beak; palate supplied with small false tu¬ 
berculous teeth ? The horns of the crescent-shaped spiracle 
turned backwards. 

HYPEROODON HONFLORIENSIS. 

PLATE XIII. 

Hyperoodon of Honfleur, Less.. —H. Butskopf, Lacepede.. —Del- 

phinus Butskopf, Bon. —D. Hunterii, Desmaret D. Biden- 

tatus, Hunter.• —Bottle-head of Dale ? called Bottle-nosed 
Whale by Blunter in his Plate xix. 

It may be observed tbat we avoid every thing like 
critical disquisition concerning classification and 
nomenclature, though these are most important as 
it regards the progress of the science. We do so 
from the conviction that such discussions are un¬ 
suited for a popular work of this nature. It may, 
however, interest our readers, for once, to have a 
specimen of the manner in which in these inquiries 
error slips in, and confusion results ; and we shall, 
therefore, here adduce a few particulars concerning 
the important genus under consideration, premising, 
* From vviouv and otious, teeth in the palate. 


THE HYPE ROOD ON 





















































































,\ 


\ 









































IIYPEROODON OF HONFLEUR. 195 

that we select this instance rather because the con¬ 
fusion is confined within narrow limits, than because 
it exhibits an average degree of the entanglement in 
which every department of this subject is involved. 

This genus was admitted upon the authority of 
M. Baussard, an officer of marine, who examined two 
individuals, mother and cub, which were stranded 
near the small village of Honfleur, and who with 
laudable zeal published an account of them in the 
Journ. de Physique , 1789. The circumstances on 
which the claim of these specimens to be considered 
generic rests, are the total want of teeth in either 
jaw, and their having the upper jaw and palate fur¬ 
nished with small unequal and hard points, which 
were about half an inch long in the cub, and some¬ 
what longer in the mother. 

j Baussard’s memoir appeared subsequent to Hun¬ 
ter s description (Phil. Trans. 178?) of his Del- 
phinus Bidentatus , which was admitted as distinct 
by Bonnaterre, Lacepede, &c. Hunter says nothing 
of false teeth in the palate, and mentions that two 
strong and robust teeth existed at the extremity of 
the lower jaw. 

These then were long regarded as two species. 
Bonnaterre, in describing the individuals examined 
by Baussard, very unaccountably assigned to them 
two teeth in the lower jaw, and he thus very natu¬ 
rally misled Lacepede, Illiger, and, for a time, 
Cuvier (Beg. Ani. 1817, i. 281). It was probably 
when holding this opinion that Cuvier, on visiting 
Mr. Hunters museum in London, and examining 


196 HYPEROODON OF HONFLEUR. 

the head of his Bidentatus, came to the conclusion 
that Baussard’s and Hunter’s specimens were one 
and the same species; belonging, however, to a genus 
perfectly distinct from all others. He attached the 
name Hyperoodon to both, and in this has been 
followed by Desmaret, Lesson, and others to the 
present time. 

But this is not all. Bonnaterre had applied the 
specific name ButsJcopf to Baussard’s specimens. 
Butskopf by others, again, was considered the same 
as Flounder s-head; but this last appellation was 
applied by Dale to the animal described by him 
under the name of Bottle-head; and Cuvier re¬ 
marking (Oss. Foss. v. 325) that Dale’s figure and 
Baussard’s very much corresponded, conjoined this 
Bottle-head to the Hyperoodons; in this following 
Hunter, who expressly says (Phil Trans. 1737, 
447) that his second Bottle-nosed Whale is the 
same as that described by Dale. Once more w T e 
have to add, that the Bottle-head of Dale is by 
Blainville identified, as we apprehend incorrectly, 
with the toothless whale which comes next to be 
described, and which is a very different animal. 

The Hyperoodon is peculiarly characterized by 
these alleged false teeth in the upper jaw; but even 
allowing that these are not to be found in any species, 
still the name has been affixed to a genus which 
without doubt exists, and which is made con¬ 
spicuous by marked peculiarities. The form of the 
head alone distinguishes it from the aodon, the only 
one of the Cetacea to which it approaches. More- 


HYPEROODON OP HONFLEUR. 1 97 

oyer, tine snout is flat, and the horns of its spiracle 
look backwards ( Cuv. Oss. Foss. 325) ; while in the 
aodon the snout is nearly cylindrical, and the horns 
of the blow-hole look forward. (Lesson . 333). 
Besides, there are three great occipital and maxil¬ 
lary crests, which go oyer the head, and are se¬ 
parated by deep furrows. Cuyier remarks concern¬ 
ing it, this cranium differs entirely from the form 
peculiar to the dolphins, and alone requires that the 
animal should be placed in a distinct genus. (Oss. 
Foss. y. 226.) 

As characters, then, we adduce the peculiar form 
of the head and skeleton; the head being higher 
than it is broad: the forehead, which is very pro¬ 
minent, terminates suddenly in a flat beak, which 
is oval at its extremity. The pectorals are very 
small; and the dorsal, but little developed, is within 
a fifth of the whole length, from the tail. The 
colour is a brownish black, verging towards white 
beneath. Its usual dimensions are upwards of 
twenty feet. It appears to be a rare variety, and 
not to live in herds. It has very seldom been met 
with. Its habits are very little known. Hunter’s 
specimen was caught in the Thames above London 
Bridge. Besides the skeleton of this one in his 
museum, Cuvier states there was also the cranium 
of another of the same species, which must have 
belonged to an individual nearly forty feet in length. 


198 


Seventh Genus.—AODONS. 

Characters .—Body fusiform ; distinct appearance of neck ; 
forehead prominent; blow-liole with horns projecting for¬ 
wards , jaw prolonged in form of a subcylindrical beak, in 
same continuous line with the head ; no baleen ; no teeth ; 
no rugosities on the palate. 


A. DALEI, Less*. 

PLATE XIV. 

THE TOOTHLESS WHALE OF HAVRE. 

Delphinus Dalei, Blainville ; Fr. Cuv. Mam.—Delphinus Eden- 
tulus, Schreb. Desmaret. —D. Micropterus, Cuv. R. A. 1829 ; 
Fr. Cuvier , Hist, des Cet. 

Tnis elegant whale belongs to the genus Aodon , 
which is characterized by having no baleen and no 
teeth. It is the only known species of the genus, 
and is with much hesitation, and we think errone¬ 
ously, by Fred. Cuvier and Blainville, made to 
correspond with the dolphin of Dale, which appears 
to be identical with the genus last discussed. 

The specimen of the animal now before us was 
stranded in 1825, near Havre; was examined by 

* Though we believe this to be a complete misnomer, yet 
we retain it, because under this name the species has been 
satisfactorily described by Blainville and Lesson. 


j£>L.\tr) 'j 

M UAVH JO Ml VIIM SSimiXCOX 3HX 

























THE TOOTHLESS WHALE OF HAVRE. 199 

Blainville, Dr. Suriray, and the son of M. F. Cuvier; 
was delineated by Fred. Cuvier, and its skeleton 
deposited in the Paris Museum; so that few of the 
Cetacea are more accurately known. The English 
name we have applied from the locality in which it 
was found. 

It has been remarked that the Aodon and neigh¬ 
bouring genera form the links of the chain between 
the larger whales and the dolphins, and we shall 
perceive presently that there is some ground for this 
opinion. The length of the specimen now under con¬ 
sideration, which was of a young one, was fifteen feet, 
and seven feet and a half in circumference. The 
head, which was distinguishable from the body by a 
marked neck, was two feet and a half long from the 
extremity of the beak to the occiput; the body, 
largest in the middle, became smaller at both ex¬ 
tremities. Seen in profile, the dorsal line was 
curved over the head and over the middle of the 
body, whilst the under line presented nearly a regu¬ 
lar curve. The muzzle was round, long, strait, and 
perfectly resembled a bird’s beak. No teeth were 
discovered in either jaw in the recent state; but after 
the gums were removed, a few, in a rudimentary 
state, as happens in the upper jaw of the cachalots, 
&c., were found in the lower jaw. The spiracle 
was two feet three inches from the extremity of the 
beak; and its horns were directed forwards. The 
eye was large, its longitudinal diameter measuring 
two inches; it had an upper eyelid, but no trace 
could be discovered of a conduit to the ear, either 


200 THE TOOTHLESS WHALE OF HAVRE. 

during life or after death. The pectorals were very 
small in proportion to the size of the animal, being 
only eighteen inches long and, six wide, situated 
three feet four inches from the front; the dorsal 
also was very small, a foot high, twelve feet from 
the anterior extremity. The general colour was 
grey; dark above, and gradually becoming whitish 
beneath. It possessed all the brilliancy of tint and 
softness which characterizes the Cetacea. 

These are the characters, drawn by Blainville, of 
this beautiful and delicate looking animal, of which 
we know of but one individual, as of one species. 
They appear quite sufficient to distinguish it from 
all the other genera. It would appear to be very 
rare; and of its habitat, disposition, and habits we 
know nothing. 


201 


Eighth Genus.— ZIPHIUS. 

Of tlie next genus, Zipliius, introduced by Cuvier, 
we shall, in this place, allude but to one of the 
three species he has established, and this for the 
purpose of satisfying the reader of the accuracy 
of those general statements we have formerly made 
concerning this most important, but somewhat dry 
portion of the order. The genus is fossile. The 
specimens, or rather fragments, which Cuvier pos¬ 
sessed, were found in various parts of Europe. He 
states that their craniums ally them to the Cachalots, 
and still more to the Hyperoodons, many of the dis¬ 
tinguishing characters of which they possess. They 
all appear to have been quite destitute of teeth. 

ZIPHIUS PLANIROSTRIS (Cuv. Oss. Foss. v. 352). 

This species was formed on the examination of 
many heads which were discovered in 1809, com¬ 
pletely petrified, in excavating the docks at Ant¬ 
werp, where they occupied the deepest parts. They 
were lying half a mile from the banks of the Escant, 
thirteen feet above the lowest run of the water, and 
thirty feet under the mean level of the town, below 
several strata of sand and clay, of various thickness, 
which contained a great number of shells and teeth 
of sharks, &c. It would appear clear that this species 
never could have had any teeth, and to use Cuvier’s 
■words, it is certain that there are none of the Cetae 
whose osteology is known, which exhibits a struc¬ 
ture similar to that which belongs to this tribe. 


VOL. VI. 


T 


202 


THIRD SUBDIVISION. 

Previous to the present century, the whole of the 
remaining ordinary Cetacea, which go to form the 
third subdivision, were, with those of the subdivision 
we have just left, classed by naturalists under the 
general term Delphinus , or Dolphins. Whenever, 
in fact, one of the Cetacea was discovered whose 
head bore the usual proportion to the body, and 
whose jaws were supplied with teeth, it was ranked 
as a dolphin. When the number of known species 
was hut small, and the characters but ill defined, 
this arrangement was perhaps sufficient; hut now¬ 
adays, when their number is greatly increased, 
and when those who know the subject best declare 
that a small proportion only of those which really 
exist have hitherto been described, it becomes 
necessary to multiply generic divisions ; and the 
term dolphin must be restricted to an individual, 
though very numerous genus. Lacepede led the 
w r ay in this division, by the introduction of his Del- 
phinaptera , which was immediately adopted by 
Cuvier, Scorseby, &c. Cuvier, again, separated the 
Porpoises from the dolphins; and Blainville in¬ 
creased the number of genera by adopting the Oxyp - 
ter a (Cetm with tw T o dorsal fins) of Rafinesque, and 
introducing the Delphinorhyncus. Lesson has still 
further added to this list. To us it appears that the 
present state of the science requires no fewer than 
the following divisions, which in this place we shall 
do no more than enumerate. The first section 


THIRD SUBDIVISION. 


203 


A. Includes those which have no dorsal fin. 

Genus a. Having the head globe-shaped. Beluga. 

- b. Having a slender beak. Delpldnapterus. 

B. Includes those which have a dorsal fin. 

Genus c. Having the head globe-shaped. Globiceps. 

- d. With a short snout, uniformly rounded. Pho- 

caena. 

- e. With a snout and a distinct beak. Delphinus. 

-- f. With a much longer snout and beak, and having 

no furrow between them. Delphinorhyncus. 

- g. Without a snout and with a long beak. Soosoo. 

—■—- h. Having a long beak bristled with hair, and both 
incisor and molar teeth. The Irda. 

- i. Having two dorsal fins. Occypterus. 

On this classification we would simply remark, 
that we have not at all innovated, hut only followed 
what has already been introduced by able and cele¬ 
brated naturalists. It would be an easy matter to 
state objections to this arrangement, more particu¬ 
larly perhaps to its nomenclature, and to demonstrate 
that it is susceptible of improvement. We feel, 
however, that we are not the parties to attempt this 
improvement, which moreover should not too hastily 
be effected. We consider the above a great stretch 
and improvement upon any that has yet been offered 
to the British public. The characters, taken from 
the fascial line, are conspicuous on the slightest 
inspection, and we believe they are for the most 
part fixed and certain. The majority of them are 
exhibited on Plate i. s , the Globiceps; t , the Por¬ 
poise ; u , the Dolphin ; the Delphinorhyncus ; 
w, the Soosoo. 


We now proceed to the genus Beluga. 










204 


Ninth Genus.—BELUGA. 

The osteology of the cranium, described by Baron Cuvier, 
supplies generic characters which distinguish this from the 
neighbouring genera. It is these peculiarities which give 
the shape to the head ; obtuse, conical, and rounded. It is 
distinguished from the Globiceps by not having a dorsal 
fin ; and from the Delphinapterus, by not having, as it has, 
a prolonged snout, like a flattened beak. 


THE BELUGA, OR WHITE WHALE. 

PLATE XV. 

Beluga, Bon .—Beluga Borealis, Less _Delphinapterus Beluga, 

Lacep. —Balsena Albicans, Lin _Delphinus Albicans, Fab. 

—White Fish, of Whalers. 

The general appearance of this very beautiful ani¬ 
mal will be more readily perceived by an exami¬ 
nation of the accompanying highly finished and 
accurate Plate, than by any words which we can 
use. The original, by Mr. Syme, w r as taken from 
an individual which for nearly three months during 
the summer of 1815 was observed to inhabit the 
Frith of Forth, passing upwards almost every day 
with the tide, and returning with the ebbing of the 
waters. During this time it was generally known 
under the name of the White Whale, and was sup¬ 
posed frequently to be in pursuit of salmon. Many 
fruitless attempts were made to secure it; but at 
length it was killed by the salmon-fishers, by means 
of spears and fire-arms. It was purchased by Mr. 
Bald of Alloa, and transmitted by him to Professor 


THE BELUGA, OR WHITE WHALE. 



PLATE 15. 












































THE BELUGA, OR WHITE WHALE. 205 

Jameson, and is now in the Royal Museum at 
Edinburgh. It was examined by Drs. Barclay and 
Neil, whose observations are published in Trans. 
Wernerian Soc. vol. iii. 

Dr. Neil well observes that the shape of this 
animal is highly symmetrical, and at once suggests 
the idea of perfect adaptation to rapid progressive 
motion in water. It resembles generally a double 
cone, one end of which is considerably shorter than 
the other. Its head is small and lengthened, and 
over the forehead there is a thick round cushion of 
flesh and fat: the body continues to swell as far as 
the pectoral fins, and from this point gradually 
diminishes to the setting on of the tail. Its length 
varies from twelve to twenty feet. Its pectorals are 
large, thick, and oval. The tail is also powerful ; is 
bent under the body in swimming, and worked with 
such force, that it impels the Beluga forward, says 
Giesecki, with the velocity of an arrow. The colour 
is usually a uniform and beautiful cream colour, 
whilst the younger ones are marked with brownish 
spots, and occasionally are somewhat of a blue or slaty- 
colour. Scorseby remarks that he has seen some of 
a yellowish colour, approaching to orange; and this 
agrees with the statement of Fabricius, who says they 
are white, sometimes tinged with red. Many contra¬ 
dictory accounts are given of the number of teeth, un¬ 
questionably arising from the fact that in this whale, 
as in most of the genera, the teeth have the greatest 
tendency to drop out as the animal becomes aged; 
thus clearly shoving how objectionable and difficult 


206 


THE BELUGA, OR WHITE WHALE. 

. ► 


it is to make these parts the ground-work of classifi¬ 
cation. Anderson states that the Beluga has no 
teeth in the upper jaw, and that this is the univer¬ 
sal opinion of the Greenland fishers (ii. 150), whilst 


there are eight on each side in the lower 

Dr. Neil gives the teeth i. e. nine on each side 
o 6 6’ 


in upper, and six on each side in lower; and Crantz 

8 9. 9 9 . 

jr-j. Cuvier, however, states them —■; in all fifty- 

four ; and this is probably another proof of his great 
accuracy. In the above enumeration, there is the 
authority of Neil, and we may add, of Crantz, for 
nine, nine, in the upper ; and Fabricius expressly 
states that he had counted nine, nine, in the lower; 
which, he adds, were like the single molores of 
quadrupeds. If, however, we are so slow in arriving 
at certainty in the dental apparatus of the Beluga, 
when are we, by this means, to determine species 
in many of the other Cetacea ? 

The spiracle is situated in the vertex, and has its 
horns turned backwards; the eye is scarcely larger 
than in man, the iris is blue; Dr. Barclay con¬ 
firms the statement of Cuvier, that in this and the 
neighbouring species there is nothing like a true 
olfactory nerve; there is no external ear, and no 
appearance even of a meatus auditorius; the mouth 
is small in proportion to the size of the animal. As 
the apparatus of the windpipe is different in dif¬ 
ferent genera, we shall here refer the reader to 
Pallas’ interesting description of the valve of the 


THE BELUGA, OR WHITE WHALE. 207 

blowing canal, which was introduced in our sketch 
of the Comparative Anatomy of the Order, and 
which will be found on p. 62. To this we now 
add the account given by the late Dr. Barclay of 
the windpipe itself. “ The arytenoid cartilages, as 
in man, appeared at first view to rest on the margin 
of the cricoid ; but on opening the larynx they were 
observed to enter more than an inch within the 
cricoid, and to form the fissure which corresponds 
with our rima glottidis. From the atlantal margin 
of the cricoid, they gradually converged till they 
come into contact, and inclined dorsad; their length 
was seven inches. The epiglottis was six inches in 
length, inclining dorsad. These meeting with a 
membrane interposed, formed a tube, which crossed 
the pharynx, and was directed to the lower orifice 
of the breathing tube.” We shall subjoin one other 
observation of this distinguished individual, as it 
regards an extraordinary structure elsewhere alluded 
to in these pages. (See page 50.) After observing 
that in this animal, as in many fishes, the spinal 
cord may be examined through certain apertures 
without disturbing the bones, he remarks, that a 
portion of the cord was found to be covered with a 
semi-cylindrical mass on each side, formed of a tough 
spongy elastic substance, with large vessels running 
through it, and freely anatomizing. These two 
cylinders occupied by far the greatest part of the 
spinal canal; the medullary cord, where examined, 
not being larger than that of man at the middle of 
the neck. (Loc. Cit, p. 393.) 


208 THE BELUGA, OR WHITE WHALE. 

The food of the Beluga is said to he cod, had¬ 
docks, flounders, and smaller fish of this description. 
It seeks them with perseverance, pursues them with 
ardour, and devours them with avidity. 

Its favourite haunts are evidently the higher 
latitudes of the Arctic Regions. They are plenti¬ 
ful in Hudsons Bay, Davis Straits, and on some 
parts of the northern coasts of Asia and America, 
where they frequent the large rivers. Steller men¬ 
tions them as being found at Kamschatka; and 
according to Charleroix, they are numerous in the 
Gulf of St. Lawrence, and go with the tide as high 
as Quebec. There are fisheries both for them and 
the porpoise in that river. A considerable quantity 
of oil is obtained, and of their skins is made a 
sort of Morocco leather, thin, yet strong enough 
to resist a musket-ball (Pen. Art. Zool. i. 183). 
They also abound near Disco Island in Greenland, 
and are not uncommon in Spitzbergen. Mr. Scorseby 
never observed them lower than Jan Mayen’s Land. 
This navigator also remarks, that he has seldom seen 
them among the ice, hut in those places where the 
water is clearest and smoothest. They are not at 
all shy, but often follow the ships, and tumble about 
the boats in herds of thirty or forty ; bespangling 
the surface with their splendid whiteness. They 
are seldom pursued by the whale fishers, not only 
because it is difficult to strike them, on account of 
their great activity; but because the harpoon often 
gives way; and they are, moreover, of comparatively 
little value when killed. It is only a few stragglers 


THE BELUGA, OR WHITE WHALE. 209 

that are seen in the southern latitudes, or even on the 
European shores. Besides the one mentioned above. 
Colonel Imrie, in 1793, saw two young ones which 
had been cast upon the beach in the Pentland Frith, 
some miles to the east of Thurso. They were both 
males, between seven and eight feet long; they were 
white, mottled with brownish-grey. 

Sir Charles Giesecki describes the White Whale 
as a migrating animal, which visits the west coast 
of Greenland regularly every year about the end of 
November. He remarks that, next to the seal, it 
is the most useful animal captured by the natives, 
and it comes at a season when their provisions fall 
very short. It arrives in herds, in stormy weather, 
with the wand from the south-west. It is captured 
by the natives with harpoons and strong nets; in the 
latter case, the nets are extended across the narrow 
sounds between the islands, and when a shoal is 
thus interrupted in its course seaward, the individuals 
are attacked with lances, and great numbers are 
frequently killed. The flesh is somewhat similar to 
that of beef, of a bright red colour, though somewhat 
oily. According to Hans Egede, “ His flesh as well 
as the fat, has no bad taste, and when it is marinated 
with vinegar and salt, it is as well tasted as any 
pork whatever ; the fins also, and the tail, pickled 
or sauced, are very good eating; so that he is very 
good cheer.” Its oil is of the best, whitest, and finest 
quality. Some of the internal membranes are used 
for windows, and some as bed-curtains; the sinews 
furnish the best sort of strong thread. 

u 


VOL, VI. 


210 


Tenth Genus.— DELPHINAPTERUS. 


The Delpliinapterus is distinguished from the Dolphin by 
having no dorsal fin; and from the Beluga, by having in 
front of the head a slender beak, flattened transversally, 
and separated from the head by a deep furrow. The 
Beluga, moreover, belongs to the northern hemisphere, the 
Delpliinapterus to the southern. 


DELPHINAPTERUS PERONII. 

PLATE XVI. 

Delpliinapterus Peronii, Cuvier , Lesson. —Delpliinus Leuco- 
gramphus, Peron _D. Peronii, Lacepede. 

Cuvier had recognized this whale, first described 
by Peron, as belonging to this genus ; but we are 
especially indebted to the able author of Zoologie 
de la Loquille for an accurate account of it. We ex¬ 
tract our description from this interesting writer. 

High southern latitudes are the resort of the 
Delphinapterus of Peron. The historian of the 
voyage of Baudin met with them to the south of 
Van Diemen’s Land, Dr. Quoy saw them near New' 
Guinea, and v T e have seen them off Magellan’s 
Straits, and among the Falkland Islands. Many 
hundreds of them surrounded the corvette, in Ja¬ 
nuary 1823, on our entering the Southern Ocean, 


THE DELPHINAPTKHT7S OF PERON 

Yoy. de la Coguille 



































































































DELPHINAPTERUS OF PERON. 211 

and one of them was harpooned by the sailors, 
which enables me to give a more accurate account 
than any previously supplied. It is alluded to in 
Kotzebue’s Voyage, under the name of Dolphin of 
Chili , and by Lacepede and Desmaret (771) as the 
Dolphin of Peron. 

The individual taken was six feet long. It is 
elegant in its form, regular in its proportions, sleek, 
and especially remarkable, in that it appears to he 
covered with a black cloak. Its snout as far as the 
eye is of a silky and silvery whiteness, so are the 
sides, the pectoral fins, the abdomen, and a part of 
the tail. A large scapulary of a deep hluisli-black 
colour, rising at the eyes where the white appears 
like a cross, is painted and bent on the flanks, so as 
to cover the upper part of the hack only. The 
anterior edge of the pectoral fins and tail is brown, 
the muzzle is prolonged, and separated from the 
cranium by a deep furrow. The iris is of an eme- 

raid-green colour. Teeth in all 156 : they 

Ot7 Oo 

are slender, pointed, and somewhat curved at the 
summit. 


Our space will not permit us to introduce the 
D. of Commerson , or any other species belonging to 
this genus. 




212 


Eleventh Genus. —GLOBICEPHALU S. 

This genus is characterized by having no visible snout; the 
head is entirely globular, and the mouth is not so much at 
its anterior extremity as at its under part. In this it re¬ 
sembles the Beluga, but differs from it in having a dorsal 
tin, as well as by many other marked distinctions. 


THE DEDUCTOR, OR CATNG WHALE. 

PLATE XVII. 

Globicephalus Deductor, Lesson .—"Delphinus Globiceps, Cu¬ 
vier, Desm _D. Deductor, Scorseby _D. Melas, Dr. Trail. 

Egede is perhaps the first author who makes 
mention of the Deductor, under the name of Buts- 
head (Descrip, of Greenland, 75) ; and he was soon 
followed by Duhamel, who gave a figure of one 
taken at Havre, under the name of “ the porpoise 
with the round snout.” In 1806, Dr. Neil, in an 
appendix to his “ Tour through some of the Islands 
of Orkney and Shetland,” gives a more extended 
and interesting account of them, under the name of 
Uyea-Sound or Ca’ing Whales, than any which had 
previously appeared; and three years after, Dr. Trail 
published in Nicolson’s Journal (1809) the first 
accurate description of this species, giving it the 
appellation of Delphinus Melas , with a drawing 
from liis friend Janies Watson, Esq., which was 


THE DEDUCTOR ORCA’iN'G WHALE 

Score.sly 









( 








PLATE 17 
























































































213 


THE DEDUCTOR, OR CA’iNG WHALE. 

republished, with additional details, by Scorseby in 
bis “ Arctic Regions, 1830.” In 1812, an interest¬ 
ing memoir concerning this variety, named by him 
Globiceps, appeared from the pen of Cuvier, in 
vol. xix. Ann. du Museum. From these sources, 
some interesting circumstances may be detailed of 
this species. 

The Globicephalus, as its name implies, has a 
head very prominent, short and round, with some¬ 
thing like a pad over its mouth, which gives it a 
very peculiar appearance. Its length is from sixteen 
to twenty-four feet; its circumference about ten or 
eleven. Almost the whole body is black, smooth 
and shining like oiled-silk; the back and sides are 
jetty-black; the breast and belly of a somewhat 
lighter colour. The dorsal fin, which is nearly in 
the centre of the body, is about two feet long at the 
base, takes a curve backward, and is crescent-shaped 
at its extremity; it is cartilaginous and immovable; 
the pectorals arise almost from the side of the 
neck, are from six to eight feet long, narrow and 
tapering at their extremity; the tail is large, ex¬ 
tending to about five feet. The spiracle is single, and 
placed in a small hollow towards the back of the 
head. The upper jaw projects somewhat over the 
lower; the teeth are not apparent in the young, 
and begin to fall out before they attain any great 
age. The normal number is not ascertained, but 
appears to be from twenty to twenty-eight in each 
jaw; they are conical, sharp, and somewhat curved 
at their summit. When the mouth is shut, the 


214 THE DEDUCTOR, OR CA’iNG WHALE. 

teeth lock into each other, like those of a rat-trap. 
In the females giving suck, the teats have been 
observed to be somewhat larger than those of a cow, 
and when pressed, milk very readily issues from 
them. Their food is sand-lances and other smaller 
fish. They are generally very fat, their blubber 
being about three inches thick, and affording a large 
quantity of excellent and pale oil. 

It would appear that the Northern Ocean, from 
the 56° to the 6(5°, is the favourite resort of the 
Deductor. Sometimes it has been witnessed in 
lower latitudes; but not frequently, nor in large 
numbers: it would also seem to have been seen in 
the Mediterranean, but whether as a mere straggler 
or a permanent residenter, we cannot decidedly 
affirm. 

Of all the Cetacea, this would appear to be the 
most sociable, often herding together in innumerable 
flocks. We shall here supply a few facts which 
establish this point. From an old history of the 
Feroe Islands, quoted by Scorseby, it would appear 
that the inhabitants are in the habit of hunting 
these animals, which they designate Grind Whales , 
and oapture them in great numbers. In the year 
1664, on two excursions only, they killed about 
one thousand. In the year 1748, forty individuals 
of this species were seen in Tor Bay, and one seven¬ 
teen feet long was captured; in 1799, about two 
hundred ran ashore in Fetlar, one of the Shetland 
Isles; and in 1805, as mentioned by Dr. Neil, in 
Februaty, one hundred and ninety, and in March, 


THE DEDUCTOR, OR CASING WHALE. 215 

one hundred and twenty more, out of a herd of 
about five hundred, were forced ashore on the same 
spot in Uyea-Sound in Unst. In 1806, ninety-two 
were stranded in Scalpa Bay, Orkney : in the winter 
of 1809 and 1810, eleven hundred and ten of these 
whales approached the shore of Hvalfiord, Iceland, 
and were captured: in 1812, seventy were chased 
ashore near the village of Bloubalzbance, on the 
coast of Bretagne; and in 1814, one hundred and 
fifty were driven into Balta Sound, Shetland, and 
were there despatched. These are only a few of the 
instances, in which, in modem times, an extensive 
slaughter of the Deductor has taken place. 

As exhibiting the nature of these occurrences, we 
subjoin an account of the capture of ninety-eight, 
which was effected in 1832 in the island of Lewis. 
u The little town of Stornaway was lately enlivened 
by a scene of the most animating and striking de¬ 
scription. An immense shoal of whales was, early 
in the morning, chased to the mouth of the harbour 
by two fishing boats, which had met them in the 
offing. This circumstance was immediately descried 
from the shore, and a host of boats, about thirty or 
forty in number, armed with every species of 
weapon, set off to join the others in pursuit, and 
engage in the combat with these giants of the deep. 
The chase soon became one of bustle and anxiety 
on the part both of man and whale. The boats 
were arranged by their crews in the form of a 
crescent, in the fold of which the whales were col¬ 
lected, and where they had to encounter tremendous 


216 THE DEDUCTOR, OR CA’iNG WHALE. 

showers of stones, splashings of oars, frequent gashes 
with harpoon and spears, whilst the din created by 
the shouts of the boats’-crews, and the multitude on 
shore, was in itself sufficient to stupify and stun the 
bottle-nosed foe to a surrender. On more than one 
occasion, however, the floating phalanx was broken, 
and it required the greatest activity and tact ere the 
breach could be repaired and the fugitives regained. 
The shore was neared by degrees, the boats ad¬ 
vancing and retreating by turns, till at length they 
succeeded in driving the captive monsters on the 
beach opposite the town, and within a few yards of 
it. The movements of the whales were now violent, 
but except when one became unmanageable and 
enraged when harpooned, or his tail fixed in a 
noose, they were not dangerous to approach. One 
young sailor, however, received a stroke from the 
tail of one of the largest of them, which promised to 
be fatal. In a few hours the whales were captured : 
the shore was strewed with the dead carcases, whilst 
the sea presented a bloody and troubled aspect, 
giving evident proofs that it was with no small effort 
that they were subdued, and made the property of 
man. On the present occasion, the whole inhabi¬ 
tants of the place, male and female, were interested 
spectators of the scene.” (Caledonian Mercury.) 
One might almost fancy that old Waller, two hundred 
years ago, was one of the witnesses of this identical 
scene. 

They man the boats, and all the young men arm 

With whatsoever may the monsters harm ; 


THE DEDUCTOR, OR CA’lNG WHALE. 217 

Spikes, halberts, spits, and darts that wound so far ; 

The tools of peace, the implements of war. 

Now was the time for vigorous lads to show 
What love or honour could invite them to : 

A goodly theatre ! where rocks are round 
With rever’nd age, and lovely lasses, crowned. 

Battle of the Summer Isles. 

It would be interesting to ascertain from what 
mental peculiarity it springs that this animal is so 
frequently stranded, so easily hunted, and so readily 
made a prey to the convenience or cupidity of man. 
It can scarcely, as has been alleged, be the result of 
their stupidity, by which they lose their way, and 
do not know the difference between land and water. 
We have seen enough to demonstrate that they are 
most sociable in their habits; and we may now re - 
mark, that they seem moreover to be endowed with 
an interesting instinct, very useful, doubtless, on 
the whole, whereby they are strongly induced to 
follow the guidance of the oldest and most expe¬ 
rienced of their number. In the words of Dr. Trail, 
they seem generally to follow one as a leader with 
blind confidence; and Dr. Neil remarks, the main 
body of the drove follows the leading whales, as a 
flock of sheep follows the wedders. Hence the 
natives of Shetland well know, that if they are able 
to guide the leaders, they are sure of likewise en¬ 
tangling multitudes of their followers. This trait 
is strikingly illustrated by a circumstance of which 
Dr. Trail was a witness. “ I once,” says he, “ was 
in a boat when an attempt was made to drive a shoal 
of them ashore; but when they had approached 

VOL. IV. x 


218 THE DEDTJCTOR, OR Ca’iNG WHALE. 

very near the land, the foremost turned round with 
a sudden leap, and the whole rushed past the boat.” 
It is from this peculiarity of their mental constitu¬ 
tion, that Mr. Scorseby, it would appear, applied to 
them the appellation Deductor. 

They appear wholly inoffensive and very timid 
animals. Thus, in all the instances on record of 
their being discovered at sea, and hunted to land, 
the chase has been free from danger, and a few frail 
boats and most ineffective weapons, with shouts and 
noise in the water, were sufficient to drive them 
from their native element to their destruction. 

They likewise manifest in a very striking manner 
that trait for which all the Cetacea seem remarkable; 
we mean maternal, and, in this case, we must add 
mutual affection. This is not only inferred from 
their associating in troops, but especially from their 
manifestation of a disposition, as we have seen in 
some of the Sperm Whales, to help and assist one 
another in their difficulties. Thus, in the case of 
the stranding of a shoal at Bloubalzbance, there 
were only twelve men, in half a dozen of frail boats, 
engaged in the pursuit. At first they succeeded in 
stranding only one of the young cubs; it immediately 
set up loud cries, which were heard by the rest, 
and an old one, which was considered its mother, 
speedily came to its relief; but she came not alone, 
the whole flock followed, and w r ere thus made an 
easy prey. Upon this point we find it stated in 
Dr. Neil’s account, that when any one strikes the 
ground it sets up a howling cry, and immediately 


GLOBICEPHALUS OK RISSO 
_ Jf. Cuvipr 



PLATE 18 


















































































































> . 






. 


• . 




















. 








• .. » 

• ■ 




-- •• V- 

•. 

, 

*■ . >■> 




* 


. . 










•: ' v. 






. 


























■ 


























. 

\ 

# 










' 












- 
























THE DEDUCTOR, OR CA’iNG WHALE. 219 

others crowd to the spot as if for its relief. We 
believe it is this circumstance which has procured 
for it the name of Ca’ing, that is, Calling Whale. 

Cuvier mentions, respecting those captured in 
Bretagne in 1812, that the flesh was soft, but that 
it was used as food by the poor in the neighbour¬ 
hood, for about a fortnight, and was used without 
any inconvenience. 

Risso states that individuals of this species an¬ 
nually visit the neighbourhood of Nice in the months 
of May and June. Upon the whole they rarely 
approach the shore, and after a short time they ap¬ 
pear to migrate. His description, though generally 
agreeing, does not perfectly correspond with that 
which we have given above. (Hist. Nat. &c. t. iii. 
p. 33.) 


THE GLOBICEPHALUS RISSIJ. 

PLATE XVIJI. 

Globiceplialus of Risso, Lesson .—Delphinus Rissii, Cuv. 

The accompanying plate exhibits a specimen of the 
only other ascertained species belonging to this ge¬ 
nus. M. Risso sent an account of it from Nice, 
with a drawing, in 1811, to Paris; when Cuvier, 
satisfied it was distinct, affixed to it the name of this 
modest and devoted naturalist. In addition to the 
generic characters, which we need not repeat, we 
remark that the shape, the colour, the appearance of 
the head and snout, and fins, may be perceived by 


220 


THE GLOBICEPS OF RISSO. 


examining the plate, first published by Fr. Cuvier. 
The spiracle is situated far hack in the head; the 
mouth is large ; in this individual the upper jaw alone 
had teeth, five on each side, which were large, conical, 
and somewhat curved, distant from each other, and 
strongly fixed in the jaw ; the inteiior of the mouth 
was covered with soft tubercles; the eye was oval 
and very small; the iris golden-coloured. 


Besides these two species here delineated and de¬ 
scribed, two other living ones have been named, 
though their existence is not quite established, the 
G. Leueocephalus and G. Fmcus. We must now, 
however, pass on to the 


FOSSILE GLOBICEPS. 

Globiceplialus Cortesi, Cuvier —Delpliinus Cortesi, Fossile. 

We shall here shortly allude to a fossile species 
which was discovered by Cortesi, and arranged in 
this genus by Cuvier. This was the first of the 
magnificent discoveries made by M. Cortesi of 
Plaisance, on the Appennine hills to the south of 
Fiorenzuola. In 1800, this enthusiastic naturalist 
procured the fossile bones of an elephant and rhino¬ 
ceros on the top of Mount Pulgnasco, one of the 
hills which descends from the Appennines to the Po; 
they were almost on the surface. Parallel to Mount 
Pulgnasco on the east, and separated by the streamlet 



FOSSILE GLOBICEPS. 


221 


called Stramonte, there descends another hill, called 
Torazza, which is lower, and, like the base of Pulg- 
nasco, is composed of blue clay filled with marine 
shells. It was in this hill, at about one hundred and 
twenty feet above the Stramonte, that M. Cortesi, 
attracted by one of the vertebra which had been 
brought him, made search, and discovered the almost 
entire skeleton of this globiceps, a circumstance 
which prompted him to all his subsequent re - 
searches, of which we have seen so many happy 
results. 

We must not enter into many details, but may state 
that the head was almost entire, as also the lower 
jaw ; even the bones of the ear were in situ. Each 
jaw had twenty-eight teeth; but supposing that it 
was ascertained, that some of the living species 
had this precise number, yet this specimen would 
still differ in certain essential and. specific characters. 
It had thirteen dorsal vertebra. After considering 
all the data, M. Cortesi inferred, with much ap¬ 
pearance of truth, that this animal must have been 
about thirteen feet long. We conclude the notice 
of this wonderful animal of stone in the words of 
Cuvier,—“ From all these considerations I cannot 
but conclude, that this fossile Cetacea is of a species 
different from all those of this genus, which, up to 
the present time, are distinctly known.” 

We now proceed to the fourth genus into which 
we divided these lesser Ceta?, viz. the Phooama or 
Porpoise Genus. 



222 


Twelfth Genus. —PHOCiENA. 


Distinguishing Characters .—The Porpoises have a short snout, 
uniformly rounded to the extremity. 

We shall introduce first, 


THE COMMON PORPOISE. 

PLATE XIX. Fig. 1. 

\ 

Phocsena Communis..—Delphinus Phoerrna, Lin. Bonn., fyc. 
Popular names, Maris Sus.—Marsouin.—Sea Pork.—-Spring- 
whal.—Tmnbler_Porpess. 

The Common Porpoise is, of all the Cetacea, that 
which is best known in this part of the world. It 
lives on our coasts, frequents our estuaries, ascends 
our fresh-water rivers, frequently exhibiting itself in 
numerous groups. 

Like the proper dolphin, it is amongst the smallest 
of the order; and between these two there is much 
general resemblance in colour, shape, and disposi¬ 
tions,—so far as these dispositions are known. The 
shape of the head constitutes a distinction. The 
porpoise has no beak, the muzzle is gently curved 
at its termination, and possesses in breadth what 
it wants in length. 





























































THE COMMON PORPOISE. 


223 


The Porpoise is usually four or five feet long, 
though sometimes as much as six or eight. We 
shall give the general descriptions in the words of 
Cuvier. It has absolutely no hair, not even eye¬ 
lashes. Its skin is perfectly smooth, and its scarf- 
skin is very soft to the touch and easily detached. 
It has no lips properly so called; hut the skin, 
always sleek and black, is somewhat strengthened 
at its union with the gums. The eye is small, and 
situated nearly in the line of the opening of the 
mouth; the eyelids are soft, and have very little 
play; their internal surface is moistened with mu¬ 
cus, but there are no puncta lacrymalia , and conse¬ 
quently no tears. The iris is yellowish; the pupil 
in form of a v, reversed. The opening to the ear is 
not larger than the prick of a pin ; that of the blow¬ 
hole is placed on the top of the head, precisely 
between the eyes, and resembles a crescent with its 
horns looking forward. Neither the dorsal fin nor 
the tail have any osseous parts in the interior, and 
the former is incapable of any separate movement, 
and is composed almost wholly of fat. 

The general shape and appearance of the porpoise 
may be seen in the accompanying Plate, fig. 1. Its 
flesh is dark-coloured and gorged with blood, and 
covered with a fatty membrane about an inch thick, 
which is quite white, and on heating is reduced almost 
entirely to an oil similar to that of the other Cetag, 
but very fine and much esteemed. The colour on the 
upper part of the body is a deep bluish black, fading 
away on the sides till it acquires a silvery whiteness on 


224 


THE COMMON PORPOISE. 


the abdomen. The pectorals are brownish, though 
they rise from a white ground. The teeth, accord- 

23 23 

ing to Fr. Cuyier, are in all ninety-two; they 

are all equally flat and cutting, straight, and some¬ 
what rounded at the edge. The brain is large and 
convex, and formed of numerous and deep convo¬ 
lutions lying over the cerebellum. Of all animals, 
the only other groups which in this respect resemble 
man, are the dolphins and the monkeys. 

The Porpoise is found in all the seas of Europe, 
in the Atlantic Ocean, and in the Mediterranean. 
In a late report of a committee of the House of 
Commons on the public works of Ireland, it is stated 
“ that Porpoises abound in almost innumerable 
shoals on the western shores of Irelandlocalities 
certainly pre-eminently suited to their tastes. It is 
to be regretted that they are not there made the 
objects of regular pursuit, for it could not fail to be 
highly useful to poor and unfortunate Ireland to 
convert these shoals to an economic purpose, not 
only for the sake of the oil, which is of the purest 
kind, but also for the skins, as alluded to at the 
conclusion of this article. The porpoises form them¬ 
selves into considerable shoals, the individuals of 
which frequently swim in a line one before another, 
never showing at the surface more than the upper 
part of their body, and in such a way that they ap¬ 
pear to make a revolving motion on themselves. 
They appear never to leave the coasts, and are 
never met with in the high seas. They ascend the 



THE COMMON PORPOISE. 


225 


rivers when led by the pursuit of fish, but do not in 
general pass the place where the salt and fresh 
water mix. It does not seem ascertained whether 
they are migratory in their habits. The inhabitants 
of Iceland fish them principally in the month of 
June ; according to Fabricius, it is principally in 
summer they frequent the coasts of Greenland ; and 
it has been remarked, that it is especially in winter 
and early spring they are met with on the northern 
coasts of France: these facts are in favour of the 
supposition. 

When the surface of the sea is smooth, they are 
often seen to spring out of the water, and to make 
considerable leaps, as if romping and amusing them¬ 
selves. This is especially the case in the fine wea¬ 
ther of summer, which is supposed to be their 
rutting season; and then they appear to be very 
combative and furious, and blind alike to all danger, 
risk, and snares. At this time they sometimes furi¬ 
ously dash against a vessel, or precipitate themselves 
upon the shore. According to Anderson, they carry 
their young six months; the cub at birth is about 
twenty inches long, and the mother, as in all the 
other genera, watches over it with the most tender 
care. In ten yeai-s it is stated to have acquired its 
full growth. 

The food of the Porpoise is chiefly fish, which it 
pursues with great rapidity and seizes with great 
address. They are occasionally observed in numbers 
to pursue the shoals of herring, mackerel, &c. which 
they drive into the bays under great apparent terror. 

VOL. VI. Y 


22!3 


THE COMMON PORPOISE. 


They are also believed to be great enemies to the 
salmon fisheries, and salmon hunts are frequently 
witnessed. It is impossible to view without asto¬ 
nishment the rapidity of their movements, and all 
their turnings and twistings in pursuit of their prey: 
the salmon are often observed to spring several 
yards out of the water, but from the quickness of 
their foes, it seems impossible they should escape. 

The Porpoise was at one time, even in these 
countries, esteemed a voluptuous article of food ; 
Malcolm IV. granted to the monastery of Dun- 
fermling those which were caught in its neighbour¬ 
hood ; and it is said to have been introduced at the 
tables of the old English nobility as late as the time 
of Queen Elizabeth. It was eaten with a sauce of 
bread-crumbs and vinegar. Much later than this, it 
was a great article of consumption in some countries 
professing the Roman Catholic faith, especially during 
the season of Lent; and accordingly, in spring, it 
was the peculiar object of pursuit. Sailors on long 
voyages, in lack of fresh provisions, were often happy 
to have recourse to it. Thus Captain Colnett, in 
1793, narrates, that, when off the coast of Mexico in 
the Pacific, they saw Porpoises in abundance, and 
took many of them, which they mixed with their salt 
pork, and so made excellent sausages; they became, 
he adds, our ordinary food (Loc. Cit. 124 ). With 
modern times a change has taken place in the tastes 
of cultivated society; but in high northern latitudes 
porpoises are still, as they have ever been, highly 
esteemed as articles of food. Thus Egede states, that 


THE COMMON PORPOISE. 227 

the flesli is by the Greenlander reckoned a great 
dainty; and in the oil, they find a beverage than 
which, according to their taste, nothing can be more 
delicious. 

In some parts of North America the skin of the 
Porpoise, like that of the Beluga, is tanned and 
dressed with considerable care. At first it is nearly 
an inch thick, but it is shaved much thinner, till it 
becomes somewhat transparent, and is then made 
into articles of wearing apparel: it also supplies ex¬ 
cellent coverings for carriages. 

In Plate xix. fig. 2., along with the common 
Porpoise, will be seen the representation of another 
variety. This is 

THE PORPOISE OF THE CAPE OF GOOD HOPE, 

Pliocsena Capensis, Dussumier , Cuvier (R. A. 289), 

Fr. Cuvier (Mam.), 

Which was first described by Dussumier from an 
individual taken in the Cape road-stead; where, 
however, it is not very common. Its length was 
about four feet; its colour almost wholly black. It 
did not appear to swim with much velocity; the pec¬ 
torals are small; the spiracle is somewhat behind the 

eyes; the teeth appear to be in all ninety- 

eight. 

The next species we introduce is by much the 
largest and most remarkable of the genus. It is 





228 


« 


THE GRAMPUS. 

PLATE XX. 

I 

Pliocspna Grampus.—Delphinus Grampus, Hunter. Desm .— 
Porcus Marinus Major, Crantz , Gesner. 

The common Grampus, so well known round the 
British, and more especially the Scottish shores, 
under that appellation. As we believe that this 
remarkable animal is the original of very many of 
the alleged species of Dolphin, so called, to guard 
against mistake, it will be necessary to introduce a 
few words in explanation. We take it to be the 
Delphinus Orca of Fabricius, Bonnaterre, and La- 
eepede ; the ButsJcopf of Anderson, and the second 
kind of ButsJcopf of Martens; the Epee de Mer or 
Sword-fish of Anderson and Crantz, and of which 
Bonnaterre and Lacepede made their Delphinus 
Gladiator. We regard it also as the Epaulard of the 
French, a name which has been very vaguely and 
generally applied; it is also the second Grampus 
of Mr. limiter; which the French naturalists, from 
a figure sent them, called the Delph. Ventricosus. 
Finally, it is the fish which the Americans have long 
been in the habit of denominating the Killer or 
Thrasher , from its reputed pugnacious and cruel 
disposition. 



PLATE 


























































































THE GRAMPUS. 


I 


229 


The name Grampus seems to be a corruption of the 
French : their Grand-poison was, by the Normans of 
the middle age, pronounced Grapois , whence in all 
probability the English Grampus, to which appel¬ 
lation its dimensions well entitle it. It is remark¬ 
able that we are still in want of an accurate descrip¬ 
tion of this species. 

An examination of the Plate will render few 
words necessary regarding its external appearance. 
It is a great animal, half the size of the Greenland 
full grown whale, being often seen from twenty-five 
to thirty feet in length, and ten or twelve in circum¬ 
ference. Its snout is short and roundish; the lower 
jaw is somewhat bent upwards, broader but not so 

long as the upper. The teeth are forty-four 

in all; they are strong, large, conical and somewhat 
hooked; those furthest back being flattened at the 
summit. The dorsal fin, nearly on the middle of 
the body, is four feet high and upwards; the pec¬ 
torals too, are very huge and somewhat oval. The 
tail is very powerful. The colour is black above, 
suddenly giving place to white on the sides, winch 
is continued over the abdomen. Generally, behind 
the eye, there is a large white patch, somewhat like 
an eyelid. 

The favourite abode of the Grampus seems to be 
the northern regions, on the coast of Greenland, 
Spitzbergen, and Davis Straits. It is also frequently 
seen in small herds in the British seas and friths, 
we believe, at all seasons. It often visits the Frith 



230 


THE GRAMPUS. 


of Forth; and according to Dr. Fleming, it goes 
up the Frith of Tay nearly as far as the salt water 
reaches, almost every tide at flood, during the 
months of July and August, in pursuit of salmon 
of which it devours immense numbers. Mr. Hunter 
mentions that one twenty-four feet long was, in 
1759, captured in the Thames; two more were 
taken in 1772 , one eighteen and the other twenty- 
one feet long; and in 1793 another thirty-one 
feet long, in the same river; w r hilst another, that 
same year, was captured in the Loire, measuring 
eighteen feet. One was caught in Lynn harbour in 
1829. This animal was discovered with its dorsal fin 
rising above the water. It was immediately driven 
into the shallows and attacked by the boatmen; 
but they not being provided with proper weapons, 
despatched it with much difficulty, by means of 
great knives and sharpened oars. The groans of 
the poor animal are described as having been very 
horrible, and the effusion of blood very great. Being 
at length deprived of life, it was towed up the river 
to the town. It was twenty-one feet three inches 
long, following the curve of the hack, and nineteen 
feet in a straight line; the base of the dorsal fin 
was about two feet and a half, and the height four 
feet; the width of the tail was seven feet (Loudon s 
Mag. iv. 338). Though these animals are cautious 
as well as daring, yet we believe such notices of 
capture could easily he multiplied. It is stated 
that they are not unfrequently seen in the Atlantic 
Ocean and the Mediterranean Sea; they are even 


THE GRAMPUS. 231 

said to be occasionally met with in all seas, though 
with what truth we cannot determine. 

From the preceding description it will appear 
that this is a very powerful animal. Sir Joseph 
Banks communicated to the Count Lacepede the 
particulars of the capture of one taken in the Thames 
in 1772. After being pierced with three harpoons, 
it pulled the attached boat twice from Blackwall to 
Greenwich, and once as far as Deptford, against the 
tide, running at the rate of eight miles an hour; and 
for a long time unimpeded by the lance-wounds 
which were inflicted when it came to the surface. 
So long as it was alive, no boat would venture to 
approach it; and the dying efforts of this formidable 
creature w r ere very terrible. It was finally killed 
opposite Greenwich Hospital. 

The Grampus has the character of being exceed¬ 
ingly voracious and warlike. It devours an immense 
number of fishes of all sizes, and especially large ones, 
including cod, halibut, skate, and turbot. When 
pressed with hunger, it is said to throw itself on 
every thing it meets with, not sparing the smaller 
porpoises and dolphins: Hunter found a portion of 
a porpoise in the stomach of one which he examined. 
It is also said to make war on seals; to espy them 
on the rocks and ice, when basking or asleep; to 
drive them if possible 'with its fins into the sea, 
where they immediately become an easy prey. They 
are often seen in small herds of six or eight indi¬ 
viduals, apparently chasing and amusing themselves; 
and when thus in company, it is alleged that they 


232 


THE GRAMPUS. 


frequently attack the true whale,—not the young 
and smaller only, hut even the greatest giants of the 
deep. They bite and tear their flesh M r ith their 
powerful teeth ; oppose their agility to its weight; 
their number to its size; their address to its power; 
their audacity to its strength ; thus they annoy, 
torment, and cover with blood and wounds their 
mighty foe. Nay more, they are stated exactly to 
resemble so many furious mastiffs fighting with a 
wild bull. Some seize the tail and endeavour to 
impede its murderous blows, whilst others attack the 
head. They seize hold of the lips and tear them 
away ; of the tongue, and devour it; and cease not 
the contest till they are finally victorious. They 
have received the appellation of Bcilcenarum Tyran¬ 
nies from the accurate Fabricius, and hence their 
popular name of whale-killers. We apprehend 
that those bloody fights, recorded with such minute 
accuracv in all the works on the Cetacea, stand in 
some need of confirmation. 


We shall next notice 
















































































233 


THE P. GRISEUS. 

PLATE XXI. 

P. Griseus of Cuvier (Ann. Mus. xix. and Rig. Ani. 290), 

Fr. Cuvier (Mam.). 

This handsome looking animal has been obtained 
only on the west coast of France, and it has been 
after years of labour*, and many mistakes, that, 
through the united efforts of Cuvier, Dumeril, and 
especially of D’Orbigny, that its true characters have 
been ascertained. Even externally it will be observed 
to differ widely from the other species, and the in¬ 
ternal differences of the bones of the cranium, &c. 
are equally marked. The head is large, obtuse, and 
somew r hat rounded ; the upper jaw is several inches 
larger than the louver; the dorsal fin commences 
about the middle of the back, and is elevated and 
pointed; the pectorals are very much developed ; 
the tail also is large. The total length is ten or 
eleven feet; the colour is a bluish-black above, and 
a dull white beneath; and these merge into each 
other on the flanks. There are no teeth in the 
upper jaw and only eight in the lower. 

At first glance it has some resemblance to the 
Peductor or Caing Whale, and in some particulars 
of their history, as their associating in groups and 
uttering loud cries, they agree. The slightest com- 

VOL. VI. Z 


234 


THE P. GRISEUS. 


parison, however, exhibits many distinctive charac¬ 
ters. Their heads are quite differently shaped, and 

the dental formularies are, of this species —, origi¬ 
nally pointed, but soon blunted; and of the Deductor 
conical and sharp, and locking into each other 

like the teeth of a rat-trap. The Deductor is twice 
the size of the Griseus; the dorsal fin, in this latter, 
is much more elevated; the colouring, too, is diffe¬ 
rent. D’Orbigny mentions that two out of the 
four stranded in 1822 had the dorsal fin destroyed, 
but whether from disease or the attacks of other 
animals could not be determined. That it was 
violently removed was however apparent. 

Individuals of this species have usually been 
brought to the coast by the violent tempests which 
sweep into the Bay of Biscay and agitate its 
troubled waters. They are famous for uttering loud 
cries, and thus attracted the attention of Baron 
Cuvier; but as we have already alluded to this cir¬ 
cumstance (see p. 55, 56), we shall not dwell upon 
it in this place. 


THE STRIPED PORPOISE. 

PLATE XXII. Fig. 1. 

P. Bivittatus_Delphinus Bivittatus, Less. 

The only other species of this extensive and well 
known genus, which we shall submit to the atten¬ 
tion of our readers, is remarkable as being one of the 



Figf.l.THE STRIPED PORPOISE. Kg'. 2. THE FUE.NAS OF THE CHILIANS. 

O v 



PLATE 22 . 














































































I 


THE STRIPED PORPOISE. 235 

smallest of the whole group, and scarcely equaling 
one-fiftieth part of the length of the largest genus, 
—the rorqual. It is interesting as exhibiting a 
fair specimen of those many beautifully coloured 
varieties, which abound more especially in the 
southern seas, and excite the admiration of those 
who have had the good fortune to behold them. 
Though placed by Lesson among the Dolphins, yet 
as the shape of the head differs from them and cor¬ 
responds with the Porpoises, we shall, as he himself 
advises (p. 338), arrange them with these latter. 

This species was seen not far from the Falkland 
Islands. For a time it followed the vessel in a high 
sea, frequently springing over the billows, and ap¬ 
parently enjoyed the resistance experienced from 
its agitated waves. It is about two feet and a half 
long, and ten inches thick. It is short and also 
slender in its forms. The upper half of its body is 
of a deep shining black colour, the belly and lower 
jaw are white. There is a large streak of satiny- 
white running along each side of its body, but in¬ 
terrupted in the middle, opposite the dorsal fin, 
where the two portions of the stripe thus separated 
enlarge. The snout is short and conical, the dorsal 
fin is moderately high, black, and placed in the 
middle of the body; the tail is brown and scooped 
out in the middle; the pectoral fins are thin and 
white, except at the anterior edge, which is black. 


236 


Thirteenth Genus.— DELPHINUS. 

Having a convex forehead; the snout, in form of a beak, is 
distinguished from the forehead by a marked furrow. 

We have already mentioned, that formerly the genus 
Delphinus included the four preceding genera and 
the succeeding genus. Lacepecle, after separating 
the Delphinapterse, introduced eleven species into 
his history; and Cuvier, after withdrawing the por - 
poises likewise, and introducing other improvements 
into the classification, reduced the number of living 
species, established in 1823, to five (Oss. Foss. v. 
275). Though the old genus Delphinus has now 
been broken down into no less than nine subdi¬ 
visions, and there are many species in these ; yet in 
the genus of proper Dolphins the number of species 
already amounts to nearly twenty, and it is the 
opinion of those most conversant with the subject, 
that this forms but a small proportion of the existing 
varieties. This great increase has been owing prin¬ 
cipally to the discoveries of recent voyagers, and 
these chiefly French naturalists, who have been sent 
out by their government in connexion with national 
voyages of discovery for scientific and commercial 
purposes; and who, after being rewarded for their 
labours, were also enabled, at the public expense, 


THE DOLPHIN. 


237 

to communicate their discoveries in splendid works, 
far beyond the risk of private adventure. Not to go 
so far back as Peron, we shall only name Quoy and 
Gaimard, the authors of the Zoologie de L’ Uranie ; 
Lesson and Carnot, who published the Zoologie de 
La Coquille; and along with them M. Dussumier, 
who, on his own account, made several voyages to 
China, and, unfortunately for science, died before 
he had digested and published the vast stock of his 
materials. It is by these gentlemen that the greatest 
number has within these few years been added to 
the list. 

The general features which distinguish the Dol¬ 
phins are few and simple. Thpir snout is con¬ 
siderably elongated, broad at the base, round at the 
extremity, resembling considerably a goose’s-bill, 
whence they derive their common appellation. The 
beak is always flattened transversely, largest at its 
posterior parts, and both jaws are supplied with 
many and sharp teeth; it is also separated from the 
forehead by a distinct groove. The dorsal fin is 
always single. 

It used to be held that the Common Dolphin w r as 
an inhabitant of every sea throughout the world. 
This appeared the more credible since the strength 
of the animals, and the velocity of their swimming, 
exceeding that of a ship in full sail, would readily 
account for their appearance in all seas, and even 
at the opposite poles. A very different opinion, 
however, is now gaining ground, confirmatory of a 
sentiment of Buffons in relation to land animals. 


238 


THE DOLPHIN. 


viz. that every distinct species has its distinct lo¬ 
cality, and this circumscribed within rather narrow 
limits. It is more difficult of course to ascertain the 
truth of this proposition as it regards the inhabitants 
of the water than of the land, and yet many facts 
go to establish its truth with regard to the Cetacea. 
Much, however, remains to be done on this and 
other points, ere we arrive at a perfect natural 
history of the order. All that we can attempt in 
this place, is to offer some remarks on the species 
which we have exhibited in the plates. 


THE COMMON DOLPHIN. 

PLATE XXIII. 

Delpliinus Delpliis, LinnBon., Lacepede, Cuvier , &c.—Oie de 
Mer, Goose of the Sea. 

This animal is perhaps better known as the ficti¬ 
tious creature of unrestrained imagination and of 
heroic poetry, than the sober Goose of the Sea. It 
is uniformly considered as the Dolphin of antiquity ; 
the original whence were produced those fantastic 
beings, endowed with all those extraordinary at¬ 
tributes and charms with which it was clothed. It 
is the Hieros Ichthys , or Sacred Fish of the Greeks, 
to which they originally paid divine honours, and 
■which they afterwards embellished with all the 
illusions of unbridled fancy. It was also sacred to 
their god Apollo ; the reason assigned for which is, 
that when Apollo appeared to the Cretans, and 
obliged them to settle on the coast of Delphis, 


THE COMMON DOLPHIN 
Cuvier. 



PLATE 23. 


















































THE COMMON DOLPHIN. 239 

* 

where lie founded that oracle so famous throughout 
antiquity, he did so under the form of a Dolphin. 
Apollo was thus, according to Visconti, adored 
not only in connexion with the Delphine province, 
but the Deiphinus fish. He was worshipped at 
Delphi with Dolphins for his symbols. The ‘ancients 
respected the Dolphin as a benefactor of mankind; 
they cherished the tale of Phalantus, the founder of 
Tarentum, being carried on shore by a Dolphin 
when wrecked on the coast of Italy; and the story 
of the musician Arion, who, when about to be thrown 
overboard by the sailors that they might possess 
themselves of his wealth, begged that he might be 
permitted to play some melodious tune, and then 
threw himself into the sea; upon which one of the 
many Dolphins, which had been attracted by the 
music, carried him on its back safe to Tanarus ; 
or rather, perhaps, according to Ovid, 

Secure he sits, and with harmonious strains 
Requites his bearer for his friendly pains. 

It is also recorded that the shield and sword of 
Ulysses bore an image of the Dolphin, and it is 
certain it is seen in very ancient medals and coins. 
It very early appeared on the shield of some of the 
princes of France; it gave a name to a fair province 
of that empire, and hence a title to the heir-apparent 
of the crown. 

Scarcely less fabulous are those other narratives 
which have been transmitted on the testimony of 
the early naturalists. They tell us that the Dolphin 


240 


THE COMMON DOLPHIN. 


made itself familiar with man, and conceived a 
warm attachment for him. Pliny narrates that in 
Barbary, near the town of Hippo, a Dolphin used 
to frequent the shore, and accept of food from any 
hand which supplied it; it would mix among those 
who were bathing, would allow them to mount its 
hack, would consign itself with docility to their 
direction, and obey them with as much celerity as 
precision (lib. ix. chap. 48). Still more extraordi¬ 
nary is that other tale the ancients relate in illus¬ 
tration of the assertion that the Dolphin was yet 
more partial to children than to adults. Thus, 
according to Pliny, in several chronicles it was 
recorded that a Dolphin which had penetrated the 
lake of Lucrinus, in Campania, every day received 
bread from the hand of a child, answering to his 
call, and transporting him on its back to school to 
the other side of the lake. This intimacy continued 
for several years, when the boy dying, the affec¬ 
tionate Dolphin, overwhelmed with grief, soon sunk 
under its bereavement. For such stories as these, 
which might be easily multiplied from Herodotus, 
Plutarch, &c. we apprehend that most of our readers 
will have but little patience ; and we therefore 
dismiss them with the well known apophthegm, 

Sed quid non Grecia mendax 
Audit in historia ? 

The Common Dolphin is usually six or seven 
feet long, sometimes nine or ten. Its proportions 
on the whole are pleasing, and admirably adapted 


THE COMMON DOLPHIN. 241 

for swimming, as may be seen in the Plate, to which 
we refer in lieu of many dry details. The pectoral 
is oval and placed very low ; the tail is large and 
powerful. Its tints, though not ga} r , are attractive. 
It is black on the back, greyish on the flanks, and 
white underneath, with a peculiar and satiny glisten¬ 
ing when in, or newly taken out of the water, which 
is striking and beautiful. It may be well, however, 
here to remark, that “ the Dolphin with its many 
dying colours” mentioned in many books, and sung 
by modern poets, is not this but quite another animal, 
belonging to a different class of the animal king¬ 
dom ; it is a true fish, the beautifully coloured 
Coryplicena Hippuris , the Dorado of the Portu¬ 
guese, and it would be w r ell if its popular name 
were altogether dropped. The eyes of the true Dol¬ 
phin are rather small, and supplied with eye-lids. 
The pupil is in the form of a heart. Mr. Rapp 
has carefully described the lachrymal gland, which 
Mr. Hunter had previously pointed out. The smell 
must be very imperfect, since the same anatomist 
could find no vestiges of the olfactory nerve, and 
there was only one small foramen in the ethmoidal 
plate. The meatus auditorius is apparent, though 
very small. The jaws are equal, and the teeth 

mount up to - J, ^ = one hundred and ninety; 

they are pointed, slender, and somewhat curved, 
at equal distances from each other, and when the 
mouth is shut they lock into one another. There are 
seven cervical, twelve dorsal, and fifty-two lumbar 


VOL. VI. 


A A 



242 


THE COMMON DOLPHIN. 


vertebrae. Finally, the brain of the Dolphin, as of 
the porpoise, is very large, and developed to an 
extent which is quite extraordinary among the lower 
animals. Its weight, in relation to that of the whole 
body has been stated as one to twenty-five, which 
is the same as that in man; the average of four 
accounts stated in Cuviers Comparative Anatomy, 
is one-fiftieth of the whole weight: in the castor 
the proportion is as one to two hundred and ninety, 
and in the elephant as one to five hundred. This 
would lead to the supposition that the intelligence 
and mental capacity of the Dolphin are considerable ; 
little direct proof indeed exists, owing to the dif¬ 
ficulty of observing the habits of the animal; but 
any indications which have been noticed are favour¬ 
able to the supposition. 

Few if any of the order appear to be more raven¬ 
ous than the Dolphins. They live upon the medusae 
and fishes, especially upon flat fish, cod, mullets, 
pilchards, and herrings. They are so bold as to 
approach the nets, and have thus sometimes been 
supposed to be the auxiliaries of the fishermen. 

The Common Dolphin is an inhabitant of the 
European Seas, of the Atlantic, and Mediterranean. 
It is more common in the temperate zone than in 
places that are further south. It is true that other 
species of this genus frequent the seas of Africa, 
Asia, and America; but it is by no means satis¬ 
factorily ascertained that the species now under 
consideration has this extensive range. The opposite 
opinion seems to be much more probable. They 


THE COMMON DOLPHIN. 


243 


navigate the waters of the ocean in more or less 
numerous troops, and their vigorous springs and 
rapid natation, which is daily observed by voyagers, 
has long made them famous. The Common Dol¬ 
phin has long been peculiarly signalized for these 
qualities, which however it enjoys only in com¬ 
mon with the larger number of its congeners, and 
on these points it does not merit any particular dis¬ 
tinction. To swim with the rapidity of an arrow, 
to shoot ahead of vessels which are scudding before 
the breeze, to spring out of the water, and over the 
waves, are qualifications possessed alike by all the 
smaller Cetacea which live in troops in the ocean. 

It may serve to exhibit the change of tastes 
produced by modem refinement, to mention, that 
Dr. Caius, the celebrated founder of the College at 
Cambridge which bears his name, records that a 
Dolphin taken in his time was thought a fit and 
worthy present to the Duke of Norfolk, who again 
distributed part of it among his friends; it was 
roasted and eaten with porpoise sauce. 


The next Dolphin we present to the notice of the 
reader is that of the Benedictin Pernetty 



244 


PERNETTY’S DOLPHIN. 

PLATE XXIV. 

/ 

Delphinus Pemettii, Desm. Blainvillei, Lesson. 

On the 30th of October the vessel of Bougainville, 
in which Pernetty sailed, being near the Cape- 
de-Verd Islands, was surrounded by about a hun¬ 
dred Dolphins, which approached very near them. 
“ They appeared,” says Pernetty, “ to have come only 
for the purpose of amusing us; they made extra¬ 
ordinary leaps out of the water; many of these in 
their capering vaulted four feet high, and turned 
over two or three times in the air.” 

One of these Dolphins which was taken, weighed 
a hundred pounds; its beak was slender, and covered 
with a thick and greyish skin. “ I think,” says the 
author, “ it was of that species which is named the 
Monk of the Sea , for the anterior part of the head 
terminated in a hood near the root of the muzzle, 
and there presented something like the edge of a 
cloak ; the back w r as black, and the abdomen of a 
pearly-grey colour, verging to yellowish, dappled 
with spots, some black and others of an iron-grey 
colour : the teeth were sharp, white, and in the 
form of those of the pike.” To these peculiar cha¬ 
racters, Pernetty adds those which are common to 
all the genus, and subjoins one which, we believe, 


'MilUL'KXT SitX'JKHffcr 






























































































































































































































































THE DOLPHIN OF PEIINETTY. 245 

is often referred to many of them, viz. that they 
exhale an odonr which is so strong and penetrating, 
that whatever substance is impregnated with it, 
retains it for many days, in spite of all that can 
be done to overcome it. 

Pernetty’s figure is well drawn; the beak is 
longer than in the common variety, and the general 
proportions are smaller; the lower jaw is curved 
and longer than the upper; the dorsal fin is more 
pointed and placed further back. 

As furnishing a lively sketch of the habits of the 
whole genus, we subjoin an account of a hunt of 
flying-fish, as narrated by an eye-witness, a fair and 
interesting journalist. “ The other morning a large 
. Dolphin which had been following the ship for some 
distance, and was sparkling most gloriously in the 
sun, suddenly detected a shoal of flying-fish rising 
from the sea at some distance : With the rapidity of 
lightning, he wheeled round,—made one tremen¬ 
dous leap, and so timed his fall as to arrive fairly 
at the place where our little friends, the flying-fish, 
were forced to drop into the sea to refresh their 
weary wing. A flight of sea-gulls now joined in 
the pursuit; we gave up our proteges for lost, when 
to our great joy we beheld them rising again, for 
they had merely skimmed the wave, and thus re¬ 
cruited contiuued their flight. Their restless foe 
pursued them with giant strides, now cutting the 
wave, which flashed and sparkled with the reflection 
of his brilliant coat, and then giving one huge leap, 
which brought him up with his prey; they seemed 


246 


THE DOLPHIN OF PERNETTY. 


conscious that escape was impossible; their flight 
became shorter and more flurried, whilst the Dol¬ 
phin, animated by the certain prospect of success, 
grew more vigorous in his bounds : exhausted, they 
dropped their wings, and fell one by one into the jaws 
of the Dolphin, or were snapt up by the vigilant 
gulls. (Sketches of Bermuda by Miss S. H. Lloyd , 
Lond. 1835.) 


THE LEAD-COLOURED DOLPHIN. 

PLATE XXY. Fig. 1. 

Delpliinus Plumbeus, Dussumier , Fr. Cuvier. 

A reference to the plate will supersede the ne¬ 
cessity of giving a long description of this species. 
The length is about eight feet; perpendicular height, 
where largest, one-sixth of the whole length; greatest 
thickness scarcely so much. The whole body is of 
a uniform leaden greyish tint, except the extremity 
and under part of the lower jaw which are whitish. 

Teeth one hundred and thirty-six. 

O u 

This species was found on the Malabar coast, where 
it is abundant. “ They frequent,” says M. Dussu¬ 
mier,” the shores and pursue the shoals of pilchards. 
Its movements are much less rapid than those which 
are found in the midst of the ocean. The natives 
capture them in nets, but with much difficulty, be¬ 
cause they seem to suspect the intentions of the 
fishermen, and very cautiously avoid the snare. 
The noise of a musket makes them fly in all direc- 



THE LEAD COLOURED DOLPHIN 



PLATE 25 
































































































THE LEAD-COLOURED DOLPHIN. 247 

tions, and after having sunk under water, they take 
a direction different from that which their plunge 
would have indicated.” These circumstances mani¬ 
fest something of that mental capacity, with which 
it is generally supposed the Dolphin is endowed, 
but which, from the veil which covers their habits, 
it is not easy to establish. 


THE BRIDLED DOLPHIN. 

PLATE XXY. Fig. 2. 

Delpliinus Frsenatus, DussFr. Cuvier. 

The length of this specimen was four feet and a half 
long ; the height and thickness of its body form 
one-sixth of the length. The spiracle is in the per¬ 
pendicular over the eyes. The dorsal fin is nearly 
in the middle of the body; its length more than 
one-fifth of the whole body; its form triangular; its 
anterior margin straight, and equal to the base ; it 
is very pointed. The tail has an acuminated edge, 
fine and cutting ; its breadth is about a foot. The 
pectoral is long and slender. It is black on the 
back ; this colour grows pale on the flanks; the belly 
is white : its head is black above; its sides are of 
an ash colour, and a hand of a deeper shade forms 
a moustache on the cheek, which extends from the 
angle of the mouth underneath the eyes. The 
number of teeth has not yet been ascertained. 

This Dolphin, a male, was harpooned thirty 
leagues to the south of Cape-de-Verd. It formed 


248 


THE BRIDLED DOLPHIN. 


one of a very numerous troop, which, immediately 
took to flight on this one being captured. The dark 
coloured band on the chops of this Dolphin, is the 
character which induced M. Dussumier to give it 
the name of Frsenatus. 


DELPHINUS SUPERCILIOSUS, Lesson. 

PLATE XXVI. 

The next species we shall adduce of this genus is a 
very beautiful small variety, for the account of which 
we are indebted to M. Lesson. 

M. Lesson observed this species after doubling 
Cape Horn in south latitude 45°. M. Garnot 
when returning to France from Port Jackson, in the 
Castle-Forbes, subsequently killed one and described 
it as follows :—Its length was four feet two inches. 
The snout was tolerably long, and distinguished from 
the forehead by a deep furrow. The dorsal fin was 
placed somewhat behind the middle of the body, 
and terminated in an acute point. All the upper 
parts of the body are of a brilliant blackish-blue 
colour, and the sides and under part shine with a 
silvery whiteness. The pectorals are brown, though 
placed on the white ground of the sides. What 
especially characterises this Dolphin is a large white 
streak over the eye, reaching to the front; and 
another mark like a white ribbon running along the 


sides of the body near the tail. Teeth 


50 30 
29 *29‘ 



snsonioagtias shrihjim 



























































































































DELPIIINUS SUPERCILTOSUS. 


249 


Though the markings of this species are beautiful, 
yet we are free to confess that we consider it next 
to impossible to convey, by any pictorial representa¬ 
tion, an adequate idea of the brilliancy and variety 
of the colouring of many of these dolphins, which 
inhabit the southern and equatorial seas : they rival 
the hues even of the feathered tribes of the tropics. 
Thus, we believe, it will generally be allowed that 
it would be difficult, with our most highly finished 
colouring, to approach the appearance presented by 
the original of the New Zealand species, thus minutely 
described by Quoy and Gaimard. “ Colour dark- 
brown above, dull white on the lower part of beak 
and body; a large yellow stripe commences at the 
eye and terminates, growing narrower bn the flanks, 
under the dorsal fin; the tail is of a slate-colour, 
pale underneath; the pectorals of the colour of 
white lead, and also the dorsal, tipt round with 
black : there is a black line over the snout, become- 
ing larger towards the eye, which it surrounds : this 
line is accompanied, on either side, with a white 
margin; the whole body shines brilliantly. 


But we must bid adieu to these numerous dol¬ 
phins, with a short notice of 


VOL. VI. 


B B 



/ 


250 


THE FtJNENAS OP THE CHILIANS. 

See PLATE XXII. Fig. 2. 

D. Lunatus, Less., Fr. Cur. 

Tins species is massive in its form ; it is about three 
feet in length; its beak is slender ; its dorsal fin 
round at the top; its colour above, a clear fawn 
colour, gradually passing into white beneath; a 
dark-brown and accurately defined cross is seen on 
the back on a line with the pectorals, and anterior 
to the dorsal fin. 

' “ This small dolphin,” says Lesson, “ destroyed 
an immense quantity of fish, and every morning at 
sun-rise, we noticed numerous troops of them, which 
unceasingly were diving, and appeared very busy in 
hunting their prey. By ten o’clock in the morning, 
when they had well breakfasted, they devoted them¬ 
selves to play, and seemed delighted with their 
leaps, and their striving which should rise the 
highest.” He adds, “ we have seen this species only 
in the Bay of Talcaquana, in the province of Con¬ 
ception, but there it is in very great numbers.” 


251 


DELPHINUS YOUNGII (Fossile). 

As after most of the other genera we have introduced 
some slight notice of nearly allied fossiles, so we 
shall here mention that a specimen of a dolphin in 
a fossile state was discovered in 1819, by Mr. Young 
of Whitby, in the vast aluminous schistus of the 
Yorkshire coast. It was embedded in the alum rock, 
where it is washed by the tide, and is covered at high 
water, half a mile east of Whitby harbour, and ten 
yards from the face of the steep cliff which there 
fronts the German Ocean. The cliff at that place 
is about a hundred and eighty feet in height, which 
of course was the depth of this skeleton from the 
surface, before that part of the cliff which formerly 
covered it w r as washed away. Though the skeleton 
was wonderfully entire, yet we are not surprised 
that Mr. Young found difficulty in identifying it 
with any living species : in all probability it belongs 
to a new one. As there is nothing conclusive con¬ 
cerning this specimen, nor concerning several others 
which are alluded to, we refer for more ample details 
to the Wernerian Trans, vol. iii. and to the Geology 
of the Yorkshire Coast by Messrs. Young and Bird. 


Fourteenth Genus— DELPHINORHYNCUS. 


The distinguishing characters of this genus are, a prolonged 
snout, with a thin and long beak, which is not separated 
from the forehead by a furrow. The form of the jaws is 
straight, and they are both supplied with numerous and 
sharp teeth. The dorsal fin is single. 

M. Blainyille introduced this generic distinction, 
and proposed its designation. The Cuviers, Des- 
maret, Lesson, and many others have adopted it. 
The difference is not great, yet it may he found 
useful in correct classification. 

The only representation of this genus we supply 
is the 


DELPHINORHYNCUS OF BREDA. 
PLATE XXVII. 


Delphinorhyncus Bredanensis, Less .—D. Rostratus, Cuv _ 

Delpliinus a long bee. Fr. Cuvier. 

Cuvier received from M. Yan Breda, professor of 
natural history at Gand, a drawing which, with an 
examination of certain crania, led him to recognise 
the existence of a new and authentic species of the 
order (Oss. Foss. v. 400). The specimen of which 
our Plate is a representation was stranded at Brest 
and there faithfully delineated. The animal ex- 



































BELPHINORHYNCUS OF BREDA. 253 

amined by M. Van Breda was eight feet long; its 
dorsal fin was elevated, and near the middle of the 
body; its pectorals were scythe-shaped; its tail 
crescent -shaped and curved in the middle. But what 
especially characterises it is the profile of the head, 
which insensibly loses itself in that of the snout, 
contrary to what is remarked in the Dolphin genus. 
All the upper parts of this species are of a sooty- 
black, and the lower of a rich rosy hue. These 
portions are not separated by a distinct and uni¬ 
form line; on the contrary, their junction is quite 
irregular, and many small black patches are figured 
on the fairer colour. The total number of teeth are 
from eighty-four to ninety-two. It would appear to 
inhabit the Atlantic. This appears to be all the 
information which has been procured regarding this 
animal. 


254 


Fifteenth Genus.— SOOSOO. 

Tlie beak is long, slender, compressed at the sides, and ex¬ 
panded at the extremity, so that it is larger at this part 
than in the middle; it is also somewhat curved at its ter¬ 
mination. 

THE SOOSOO OF THE GANGES. 

PLATE XXVIII. 

Soosoo Gangeticus, Lesson .—Delphinus Gangeticus, Rouburyh , 
Lebeck, &c.—Platanista of Fr. Cuvier. 

Of all tlie beaked Dolphins, says Cuvier, the most 
extraordinary, and that perhaps which most merits 
being formed into a distinct genus is the Soosoo of 
the Ganges. 

This genus at present comprehends but one living 
species, which is generally described under the name 
of the Dolphin of the Ganges ; the name Soosoo is 
that given it by the natives in Bengal. Cuvier 
thinks it is probably the Platanista of Pliny. Tlie 
bony frame-work proves the peculiarities of this 
genus more than any other portion of it, and on 
this Cuvier dwells with his wonted acuteness. 
(L. C. 279.) Of the manifest characters, the great 
lateral compression of the lower jaw, which approxi¬ 
mates the two rows of teeth, and the great length of 
the symphysis, are the most remarkable. Accord- 


THE SOOSOO OF THE GANGES. 

































































































































THE SOOSOO OP THE GANGES. 255 

ing to Cuvier, tlie long symphysis and the maxillary 
crests approximate it to the Cachalots. 

The body of the Soosoo is rather longhand slender, 
thickest about the fore part, and thence tapering to 
the tail. The head is obtuse, somewhat acumi¬ 
nated at the upper and anterior part, and suddenly 
tapering to a long and slender, hut strong beak. 
Both jaws are very strong, nearly equal, and almost 
straight; their length is nearly one-sixth of the 
whole animal. The pectorals are of an oblique fan- 
shape, about a foot and a half long, and a foot broad 
at the posterior margin, which is scalloped. Instead 
of a dorsal f.n, there is only a projecting angle, 
somewhat nearer the tail than the snout. The tail 
is two feet and a half broad, and festooned. The 
colour is a shining pearly grey, with here and there 
lighter coloured spots, particularly when the animal 

is old. Teeth ■ ,! ° , 120. Those before are larger, 
30 30’ ° ’ 

sharper, more approximated, and somewhat curved ; 
they become gradually smaller, shorter, and more 
remote from each other, as they approach the throat ; 
and they lock into those of the opposite jaw. The 
eyes are exceedingly minute, about a line in dia¬ 
meter, of a bright shining black colour, situated four 
inches above the angle of the mouth, and sunk 
deep in their small round orbits. The spiracle is 
situated on the summit of the head; it is linear, 
and somewhat like the letter f y the length running 
longitudinally along the body. The meatus audi- 
torius is open and observable. There are seven cer- 



256 THE SOOSOO OF THE GANGES. 

vical vertebras, eleven or twelve dorsal and twenty- 
eight lumbar, in all fifty-six or fifty-seven. 

“ They are found in great numbers,” says Dr. 
Roxburgh (Asiatic Researches , vii. 176), “ in the 
Ganges, even so far up as it is navigable; but seem 
to delight most in the slow moving labyrinth of 
rivers and creeks which intersect the delta of that 
river to the south and east of Calcutta. When in 
pursuit of the fish on which it feeds, it moves with 
great velocity and uncommon activity ; but at all 
other times, so far as I have been able to observe, 
its motions are slow and heavy, often rising to the 
surface of the water to breathe. Between the skin 
and flesh is a coat of pale-coloured fat, more or less 
tl lick, according to the state of the animal. On 
this the Hindoos set a high value, as an external 
remedy of great efficacy in removing pains, &c. The 
flesh is like lean beef, but so far as I can learn, the 
natives never eat it. In the stomach of the one 
examined, rice and fragments of shells were found, 
and many living ascarides, about two inches long.” 


257 


/ 


I 


THE SOOSOO OF M. DE BORDA. 

Soosoo Bordaii (Fossile), Cuv. 

This species was discovered by the late M. de Borda 
at Sort, a village about six miles from Dax, in beds 
of a species of falun, which are rich in all sorts of 
shells and other products of the sea. Very con¬ 
siderable fragments of the jaws were procured and 
sent to Paris, where at first they were considered 
as belonging to the crocodile of the Ganges. Cuvier, 
however, speedily demonstrated that this could not 
be the case, and that they must have belonged to 
a cetaceous animal. According to him, its head 
must have been two feet long, and its whole extent 
about nine feet. From the lower jaw, he inferred 
it must have been either a dolphin, in the extended 
signification of that term, or a cachalot ; and from 
the fragments under inspection, it was most likely 
to be the latter, as none of the dolphins had the 
lower jaw so formed, except the Gangeticus. An 
examination, however, of the upper jaw speedily 
settled this point, in as much as it had teeth, which 
the cachalot has not. Cuvier concludes, that it is 
certain that this Cete does not belong to any of the 
species, the osteology of which is known. Tim 
Gangeticus has the symphysis of the lower jaw ex- 
VOL. vi. c c 


258 THE SOOSOO OF M. DE HOIIDA. 

tremely compressed, whilst that of this fossile is 
broader than it is high. The teetli also are quite of 
another form. Neither the level above the sea, nor 
the relation of the specimen to the neighbouring 
county, are recorded in the sources whence we 
have extracted this truly interesting notice. 



6Z :tIV r kT 



























































































































Sixteenth Genus. —INIA. 


The Inia lias the beak long like that of the Dolphin, but 
cylindrical, and bristled with strong hairs; it has many 
teeth, incisors anteriorly, molares posteriorly. The tem¬ 
poral fossa and crest are also peculiar. 


I. BOTd V1ENSTS, IVOrbignv, Pr. Cuvier. 

PLATE XXIX. 

It is to M. D’Orbigny we are indebted for our 
acquaintance with this curious animal, which he 
has very properly placed in a new genus, thereby 
establishing a link between the Soosoo and the 
Stellerus, one of the herbiverous Cette. A\ r e have 
found the Soosoo in the water of the Ganges, a 
hundred miles from the ocean. But the Boliviensis 
is met with thousands of miles from the sea, and it 
appears to be an inhabitant solely of rivers and fresh 
water lakes. It was in the early tributaries of the 
Amazons, and in the lakes of High Peru, it was 
found; and when M. D’Orbigny first heard of it in 
these regions, he v/as not a little sceptical that he 
should encounter one of the whale tribe at the foot 
of the Cordilleras. 

In the principality of Beira, however, where they 
are in the habit of killing them for their oil, one 
was harpooned, and brought to the party alive ; 


INIA BOLITIENSIS. 


l 


260 


another very young one was also at the same time 
examined. 

In form it resembles the Dolphins, hut the body is 
shorter and nfore slender. The snout is in the form 
of a long and very slender beak, almost cylindrical, 
and obtuse at its extremity. The lips reach as far 
hack as the line of the eye; the blow-hole runs 
obliquely from before backwards, and opens so far 
back as to be in the perpendicular over the pectoral 
fins. The auditory opening is larger than is usual 
in the Cette. The pectorals are large; the dorsal, 
but little developed, is placed two-thirds down the 
back; the tail is deeply forked. It has about one 

hundred and thirty-four teeth ; all are rough, 

and marked with deep and interrupted furrows; 
anteriorly they resemble incisors, posteriorly they 
have an irregular mammalory shape, which is very 
peculiar. The skin is fine and smooth; the snout 
is bristled sparingly with coarse and crisp hair: this 
was seen also in the cub. The mother was seven 
feet long; and the males are said to be double that 
size. Its colour varies : commonly it is a pale blue 
above, passing into a rose colour beneath; the tail 
and pectorals are blue. Some are all over of a rosy 
hue, others are blackish, and some are covered with 
spots and streaks; the tints are paler when they 
frequent the rivers, and darker when they retire 
to the lakes. 

This species is found in all the streams which 
traverse the immense plains of the province of 



IN7A BOLIYIENSIS. 


261 


Moxos, and which, go to form the rivers constituting 
the Madieras, one of the earliest branches of the 
Amazons; the animal ascends almost to the foot of 
the Eastern Cordilleras, more than two thousand 
one hundred miles from the sea: hut it is not pro¬ 
bable that it goes beyond the cascades of the river 
Madieras. 

This Inia comes more frequently to the surface 
of the water than the marine varieties, and does 
not appear so remarkable for the agility and power 
of its motions. They habitually unite in little troops 
of three or four individuals, and they are observed 
to raise their snouts from the water whilst devouring 
their prey, which appears to consist entirely of fish. 
The mother exhibits all the usual affection of the 
order for her young, and is all devotedness to its 
well-being and safety. 


2 G2 


Seventeenth Genus.— OXYPT ERUS. 

With two dorsal fins. 

M. Refinesque Smaltz, a naturalist established in 
Sicily, proposed this name for a dolphin with two 
dorsal fins, which he affirmed he had seen in the 
Mediterranean. The evidence he o'ave of its exist- 
ence was unsatisfactory, and had not Messrs. Q.uoy 
and Gaimard, in their voyage, met with another ex¬ 
ample of this very singular genus, it would probably 
have been passed by in this place. This was the 

RHINOCEROS WHALE. 

Oxypterus Rhinoceros, Lesson .—Delphinus Rhinoceros, 
Quoy and Gaimard. 

As no individual of this species was captured, we 
cannot present any plate which could be depended 
upon ; we copy, however, from the atlas of Quoy and 
Gaimard, a cut which will assist the imagination 
and rivet the peculiarity on the memory. 

We shall quote the words of these eminent 
voyagers. “ In October 1809, in going from the 
Sandwich Islands to New South AY ales, many Dol¬ 
phins, in troops, were performing their rapid evolu¬ 
tions about our vessel. Every one on board was 


THE RHINOCEROS WHALE. 


203 




















































264 


THE RHINOCEROS WHALE. 


surprised to perceive that they had a fin on their 
head bent backwards, the same as that on their 
backs. The size of this animal was about double 
that of the common Porpoise ; and the upper part 
of its body to the dorsal fin was spotted black and 
white. 

“ We did our best to examine them, all the time 
they accompanied us ; but although they often passed 
the prow of the vessel, with the highest part of 
their back out of the water, yet their heads were so 
submerged, that neither M. Arago nor we could 
discover whether their snout was long or short; and 
their habits could not assist us on this point, because 
they never sprang above the wave, as is common 
with other species. From their very singular con¬ 
formation, we have assigned them their name—Rhi¬ 
noceros.” 


FINIS. 


EDINBURGH : 

PRINTED BY W. H. LI2ARS. 
















' v,‘i